Sei sulla pagina 1di 306

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 16 / 18 / 160 / 180 – Model C

Connection Manual (Hardware)

GFZ-62753EN/01 November 1995


GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory


with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 1995 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.


All Rights Reserved.
B–62753EN/01 Table of Contents
1. PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS OF CNC AND SERVO UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3 POWER CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.4 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.5 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.5.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.5.2 Cooling by Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.5.3 Heat Loss of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.6 INSTALLING THE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.6.1 Cooling Fin A/B/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.6.2 Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.6.3 The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.6.3.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.7 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.7.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.7.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.7.3 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.7.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.7.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.8 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.8.1 Configuration and Installation of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.8.2 Battery for Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.9 CABLE LEAD–IN DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

4. TOTAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56


5.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT PANEL LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.3 24V INPUT POWER SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.3.1 Power Supply for the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.3.2 Procedure for Turning on the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.3.3 Procedure for Turning off the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.4 CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67


6.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.2 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

c–1
    
B–62753EN/01

6.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70


6.2.3 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.3 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.3.1 Structure of FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.3.2 Outer Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.3.3 Mounting and Dismounting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.3.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.3.5 Connecting Input Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.3.6 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.3.7 Connecting Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.3.8 Connecting with I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.3.9 Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6.3.10 Correspondence between I/O Signals and Addresses in a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6.3.11 Number of Points for I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.4 CONNECTION OF MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.4.1 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.4.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.4.3 Signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.4.4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.4.5 PMC Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.4.6 Major Connection Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.4.7 State of the LEDs on the Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.4.8 Connector (on the Cable Side) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.4.9 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Dimension Diagram
(Including Connector Locations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.4.10 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Mounting Dimension Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.4.11 Fuse Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.5 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.5.1 Input Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6.5.2 Output Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.5.3 Connector Layout for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.5.4 External View of Operator’s Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.6 CONNECTION OF SOURCE OUTPUT TYPE CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.6.1 Input Signal Specifications for Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.6.2 Output Signal Specifications for Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.6.3 Connector Pin Layout for Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.6.4 Dimensions of Source Output Type Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.7 CONNECTION OF FS0 OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.8 I/O CARD CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.8.1 Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
6.8.2 Specifications of the Output Signals of the I/O Card (Sink Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.8.3 Connector Layout for Sink Output Type I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.8.4 Input Signal Connector Pin Layout for Sink Output Type I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.8.5 Output Signal Connector Pin Layout for Sink Output Type I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.8.6 Address Mapping of I/O Card (Sink Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.9 SOURCE OUTPUT I/O CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
6.9.1 Input Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

c–2
B–62753EN/01     

6.9.2 Output Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145


6.9.3 Connector Layout for Source Output Type I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6.9.4 Input Signal Connector Pin Layout for Source Output Type I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.9.5 Output Signal Connector Pin Layout for Source Output Type I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6.9.6 Address map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6.10 USE OF TWO I/O CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.10.1 Specifications of Input and Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.10.2 I/O Card Address Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.10.3 Addresses Assigned to Each I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161


7.1 CRT/MDI UNIT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7.1.2 CRT, PDPor LCD Display Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
7.1.3 Adjusting the Flat Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
7.1.4 Contrast Adjustment for Monochrome LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
7.1.5 Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.2 I/O DEVICE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
7.2.1 RS–232–C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
7.2.2 PPR Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
7.2.3 Portable Tape Reader Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
7.2.4 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
7.2.5 Connection of Tape Reader without Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
7.2.6 Connection of Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
7.3 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.3.1 Signal Specifications for Manual Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.4 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–232–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
7.5 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
7.6 DNC1 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
7.6.1 Multi–points Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
7.6.2 1 to 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
7.7 DNC2 INTERFACE (RS–232–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
7.8 HIGH SPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
7.8.1 Receiver Input Signal Specifications for High–speed DI Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
7.9 SPINDLE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
7.9.1 Serial Spindle Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.9.2 Analog Spindle Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.9.3  Series Spindle Amplifier Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.9.4 Position Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
7.10 SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.10.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
7.10.2 Servo Amplifier Interface ( series servo amplifier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
7.10.3 Serial Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
7.10.4 Separate Type Detector Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
7.10.5 APC Battery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
7.11 ANALOG SIGNAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
7.12 HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

c–3
    
B–62753EN/01

APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

D. LIST OF UNIT FOR CE MARKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

c–4
B–62753EN/01 1. PREFACE

1 

This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required


for connecting the CNC control unit to a machine tool. The manual
outlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC control units,
as shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2, and supplies
additional information on using these components. Refer to individual
manuals for the detailed specifications of each component.

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are :


Product Name Abbreviations

FANUC Series 16–TC 16–TC


Series 16
FANUC Series 16–MC 16–MC

FANUC Series 18–TC 18–TC


Series 18
FANUC Series 18–MC 18–MC

FANUC Series 160–TC 160–TC


Series 160
FANUC Series 160–MC 160–MC

FANUC Series 180–TC 180–TC


Series 180
FANUC Series 180–MC 180–MC

Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to MODEL C of Series 16, Series
18, Series 160 and Series 180.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Manuals Related
Specification
Manual name
Number
DESCRIPTIONS B–62752EN

CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–62753EN *


CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–62753EN–1

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For LATHE) B–62754EN

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (FOR MACHINING CENTER) B–62764EN

MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–62755EN

PARAMETER MANUAL B–62760EN

PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61803E–1


(Macro Compiler / Macro Executer)

FAPT MACRO COMPILER PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–66102E

1
1. PREFACE B–62753EN/01

Table 1 Manuals Related


Specification
Manual name
Number
FANUC Super CAP T OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62444E–1

FANUC Super CAP M OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62154E

FANUC Super CAP M PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–62153E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING B–61804E–1


FUNCTION I FOR LATHE (Series 18–TB)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING B–61804E–2


FUNCTION FOR LATHE (Series 15–MODEL B, Series
16 CAPII) OPERATOR’S MANUAL

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING B–61874E–1


FUNCTION I FOR MACHINING CENTER
OPERATOR’S MANUAL

2
B–62753EN/01 2. CONFIGURATION

2 CONFIGURATION

The following figure shows the configuration of the electrical system of


the machine tool with which this control is used.
This manual describes how to connect the units illustrated in this diagram.
The machine tool body, machine operator’s panel, power magnetic
circuit, and sensor/actuator are specific to the machine tool and are the
builder’s responsibility. This manual does not cover the internal
connection of these units to the machine tool. The numbers in parentheses
shown in the diagram are section references for this manual.

Machine tool magnetic cabinet

Heat CRT/MDI
exchanger unit
(3.6)

Operator’s Machine
panel interface operator’s
(6.4, 6.5) panel I/O device

Relay connector (7.2)


Manual pulse generator
(7.3)

Control unit Power Sensor /


(3.8) I/O unit magnetic actuator
circuit
(Note1)
(5) (6.2, 6.3, 6.7–6.9)

(Note 2) Servo
Servo
Multi–tap amplifier motor
transformer for (7.10)
the control unit

Spindle
amplifier (Note 2) Spindle
(7.9) motor

Power
supply
(7.4, 7.5, 7.6) Host computer

Distribution
board

Note 1 Refer to the ”FANUC I/O Unit Model A Connecting Maintenance Manual (B-61813E)”.
Note 2 Refer to the following manuals:
“FANUC AC Servo Motor α Series Descriptions (B-65142E)”
“FANUC AC Spindle Motor α Series Descriptions (B-65152E)”
“FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER α Series Descriptions (B–65162E)”

3
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3 INSTALLATION

4
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

3.1 The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
ENVIRONMENTAL this manual “cabinet” refers to the following:
REQUIREMENTS  Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
OUTSIDE THE control unit or peripheral units;
CABINET  Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC;
 Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel.
 Equivalent to the above.

The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall


conform to the following table. Section 3.4 describes the installation and
design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
In operation 0 to 45
Room temperature
temperat re
In storage or transportation –20 to 60
Change in
1.1°C/minute max.
temperature
Normal 75% or less
Relative humidity
h midity
Temporary (within 1 month) 95% or less
Vibration In operation: 0.5G or less
Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be considered if the cabinets
Environment
are in a location where the density of dust, coolant,
and/or organic solvent is relatively high.)

3.2 Room temperature


temperat re
In operation 0°C to +55°C

INSTALLATION In storage or transportation –20°C to +60°C


Relative humidity 95% RH or less (no condensation)
REQUIREMENTS OF
Vibration 0.5 G or less
CNC AND SERVO
The unit shall not be exposed direct to cutting oil, lu-
UNIT Environment
bricant or cutting chips.

3.3 The power capacity of the CNC control unit, which in this section means
the specification required for the power supply, is obtained by adding the
POWER CAPACITY power capacity of the control section and the power capacity of the servo
section.
The power capacity of the control section includes the power capacity of
the control unit, CRT/MDI, I/O unit, and operator’s panel interface.
Power capacity of When power supply AI is used and AC out- 0.3kVA
the control section put terminals CP2 and CP3 are not used.

When power supply AI is used and AC out- 0.8kVA


put terminals CP2 and CP3 are used.

When power supply BI is used and AC out- 0.5kVA


put terminals CP2 and CP3 are not used.

When power supply BI is used and AC out- 1.0kVA


put terminals CP2 and CP3 are used.

Power capacity of Depends on servo motor type.


the servo section

5
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.4 When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions


described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
DESIGN AND CRT screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
INSTALLATION considered. The cabinet design must meet the following conditions :
CONDITIONS OF THE D The cabinet must be fully closed.
MACHINE TOOL The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne
MAGNETIC CABINET dust,coolant,and organic solvent.
Cabinets that let in air may be designed for the servo amplifier and
servo transformer provided that they :
- Use an air filter on the air inlet ;
- Place the ventilating fan so that it does not blow air directly toward
the unit;
- Control the air flow so that no dust or coolant enters the air outlet
D The cabinet must be designed to maintain a difference in temperature
of 10°C or less between the air in the cabinet and the outside air when
the temperature in the cabinet increases.
See Section 3.5 for the details on thermal design of the cabinet.
D A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within.
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.
CAUTION : If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust
easily adheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail.
D For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between
each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
D Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in order
to seal the cabinet.
Because the CRT unit uses a voltage of approximately 11 kV, airborne
dust gathers easily. If the cabinet is insufficiently sealed, dust passes
through the gap and adheres to the unit. This may cause the insulation
of the unit to deteriorate.
D The CRT/MDI unit must be installed in a location where coolant
cannot be poured directly on it. The unit does have a dust–proof front
panel.
D Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts that
generate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts in the
magnetics cabinet.
The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design
to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted
to the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.7 for details of noise
elimination/management.
D The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they are
easy to inspect and maintain.

6
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

 The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.


Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.
If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,
electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near the
CRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To prevent
this, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generally must be kept
300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not
300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changing
the direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.
The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased by
magnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interacting
with each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magnetic
sources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.
If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorted
despite the distance, cover the screen with a magnetic shield.
 The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installed
in the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm
or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.

Top
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall
extend from the bottom of this
unit.)

Bottom

7
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.5 The purpose of the thermal design of the cabinet is to limit the difference
in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10°C
THERMAL DESIGN OF or less when the temperature in the cabinet increases.
THE CABINET The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.

3.5.1 The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°C



 
per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in a
cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
   
 
 cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the
difference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air
to 10°C or less when the temperature in the cabinet rises:
Internal heat loss P [W] 
6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2]×10[°C] of rise in temperature
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10°C under these
conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240W. If the actual internal
heat is 320W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 13°C or
more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be
improved using the heat exchanger described next.

3.5.2 If the temperature rise cannot be limited to 10°C by the cooling capacity
   
 of the cabinet, a heat exchanger must be added. The heat exchanger
forcibly applies the air from both the inside and outside of the cabinet to
 
 the cooling fin to obtain effective cooling. The heat exchanger enlarges
the surface area. Section 3.7 explains five heat exchangers supplied by
FANUC. Select one of these according to the application.
If cooling fin A is used for the cabinet, the total cooling capacity of a
cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 in the example above is improved
as follows :
6W/m2⋅°C × 4m2 + 9.1W/°C= 33.1W/°C
The calculated value verifies that even if the internal heat is 320 W, the
temperature rise can be limited to less than 10°C.
See Section 3.6 for installing the heat exchanger.

8
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

3.5.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit Name Heat Remarks
loss
Basic unit (2 slots) 60W Power supply AI
Basic unit (4 slots) 60W Power supply AI
Basic unit (6 slots) 80W Power supply BI
Basic unit (8 slots) 80W Power supply BI
Main CPU board 20W
Control unit Option 1 board 15W
Option 2 board 15W
Option 3 board 15W
I/O card (Sink type, Source type) 15–20 *1
W
Robot control board 15W
9″ monochrome CRT/MDI 14W For small type
CRT/MDI and stan-
dard type CRT/MDI
9″ color CRT/MDI 40W
CRT/MDI 9″ monochrome PDP/MDI 20W
8.4″ color LCD/MDI 20W
9.5″ color LCD/MDI 20W
14″ color CRT/MDI 70W
Operator’s panel connection unit 30W
O erator s
Operator’s
panel Machine operator’s panel inter- 24W
face unit
I/O Unit AIF01A, AIF01B 1.2W
AID32A, AID32B 1.2W + 0.23W number
of ON points
AID16C, AID16D 0.1W + 0.21W number
of ON points
AID32E, AID32F 0.1W + 0.23W number
of ON points

Refer to FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER α Series


Descriptions (B–65162E) for heat loss of servo amplifier.

*1 : 5W for 5V type ; 0.175W per pin that is turned on for 24V.

9
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.6 Table 3.6 lists the heat exchangers.Cooling fins A, B and C are not
provided with a fan. Note that a fan motor is required for any of these
INSTALLING THE cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.
HEAT EXCHANGER
Table 3.6 List of Heat Exchangers

Ordering Cooling
Name Size
specification capacity

Cooling fin A A02B–0053–K303 9.1W/°C 196 90 1000mm

Cooling fin B A02B–0053–K304 10.1W/°C 444 90 650mm

Cooling fin C A02B–0053–K305 25.2W/°C 560 90 970mm

Heat pipe type


A02B–0094–C901 9.0W/°C 226 132 415mm
heat exchanger

Heat exchanger for


A02B–0060–K401 5.0W/°C 590 86 480mm
CRT/MDI unit

3.6.1 The cooling fin is shown in Fig. 3.6.1 (a).


 
 


Viewed from cabinet mounting side

Fig. 3.6.1(a) External view of cooling fin

10
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

It is installed in a cabinet made by the machine tool builder.

Cabinet
Cooling fin

Inside air
flow

Outside
air flow

Fig. 3.6.1(b) Internal view of cooling fin

The cooling fin can be installed in two ways, as shown in Fig.3.6.1(b).


The following lists the general precautions to be observed when using the
cooling fins :
D The fans are not included with the cooling fin. They should be
provided by the machine tool builder.
D Bring in the outside air from the bottom and exhaust the hot air from
the top.
D The inside air may flow from top to bottom or bottom to top. However,
generally decide the direction as follows :
- Bring in the air near high heat loss components.
- Exhaust the air toward the most important components to be
cooled.
D For the cooling fin to display the specified cooling capacity, the air
inside the cooling fins must flow at a velocity of 2.5 m/sec or greater.

(velocity of air flow measurement)

Set the slit to the intake side and


measure the velocity at the slit.

11
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

 Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the door
does not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins are
equipped with packing.

External dimensions

196 183
90 Fan mounting
plate Mounting metal for
100

136 cooling fins (sheet met-


Terminal block for al about 3mm thick).
fan motor G–04

1000
570

70
(Attached to the
cooling fins. Its Cooling fins
4–M4
685

mounting height is 20mm)


Mounting metal
screw for Fan motor for cooling fins
cooling fins 260
220
10
70
136 24.7
5 150 Door
24.7
455 Mounting plate
4–M4
mounting screw 168 40 for fan motor
for fan mounting C15
plate 180188

Mounting diagram (example)


570

770
260

PANEL CUT DRAWING Note1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting
metal for cooling fins are not attached to the cooling
70

fins.
So, prepare them at the machine tool builder.
45

164
Note2 Use two fan motors with about 50W power.
Note3 Weight : 6.5kg

Fig. 3.6.1(c) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin A (02B–0053–K303)

12
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

External dimensions Mounting stud for cooling fins


(2 studs are attached for the top and the bottom)
444 90 Mounting plate
72 for fan motor
25
60
300

Cooling fins
435 Fan motor
650 300
124
116 72 256–6
dia
14
Mounting 1 6 Mounting hole
350 432
hole for 02 10 Mounting plate
fan motor 370 4 6 for fan motor
1 418
4–M4 20 Terminal block for fan motor G–04 
4
(Attached to the cooling fins.
4–M4 370 Its height is 20mm)
350 Mounting diagram (example)
(Mounting hole for
fan motor) Hole External shape
116 124 of cooling fins
300
358 400

Hole
60 30
300
6–6 dia. hole or 135
M5 stud bolt 25 432

Stud hole 5 dia


(Make a hole 5 dia. for
fan motor) Note1 Fan motor and mounting plate are not attached to the
cooling fins. So, prepare them, at the machine tool builder.
 
    Note2 Use four fan motors with about 20W power.
Note3 Weight : 7.5kg

Fig. 3.6.1(d) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin B (A02B–0053–K304)

13
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Mounting stud for cooling fins


External dimensions
(Attached to the cooling fins)
560 90 Mounting plate
23 for fan motor

115
60 335
266
266 Cooling fins
695 Terminal block 315
970 for fan motor Fan motor
210 G–04
6–M4 60 287
(Attached to the 8–6 dia.
Mounting 37
213
233 10 cooling fins. Its mounting hole
hole for fan 35 height is 20mm) 548 610
520 6
motor 37
6  

6 548   
5M–4 440  
(Mounting hole for Door 40
fan motor)

170 430
155 External shape of  

    
335 cooling fins
5 DIA
(This hole
315 combines
6–6 dia. hole or M5 mounting hole 775
stud bolt and stud hole.)
287 Note1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are
60 not attached to the cooling fins. Prepare them at the
514 machine tool builder.
10
25 Note2 Use two fan motors with about 40W power.
Panel cut drawing Note3 Weight : 13.5kg

Fig. 3.6.1(e) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin C (A02B–0053–K305)

14
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

3.6.2
Heat Exchanger for
CRT/MDI Unit

External dimensions of External dimensions of


finger guard external cooling fun
+0.5
5"1 4.3–0

38+0.5 119.5+0.5
6+0.3 6+0.3 104.8+0.3
364 8–43
Hole

+1.5
152.5 –0.5

104.8 +0.3
119.5 +0.5
AIR
FLOW

Lot No.

1.6 Weight : 0.65kg


81 5
20

Air inlet
220

Packing
Power terminal
480

M4 screw
200VAC 50Hz
200/220VAC
60Hz
220

48W

Air outlet
20

378

6–6 390
Connector for Cooling fin : About 6kg
external cooling fan (Excluding attached parts)

Note ) External cooling fan and finger guard are attached beside cooling fin.

Fig. 3.6.2(a) External dimensions of external cooling fan and cooling unit for CRT/MDI
(A02B–0060–K401 (Note))

15
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Heat exchanger

Outside Inside
Air outlet
23 15=345

15

10
20

Air outlet

50
Main body of
10 (4) heat exchanger
220
480

(3)
220

Air inlet

(1) Prepare
70

External cooling fan


mounting
(attached)
20

screws and
378 Finger guard
mounting panel
(1) 390 (attached)

(1) Use M5 screws to mount the heat exchanger.


(2) Be careful with air flow when securing the external cooling fan.
(3) Prepare a mounting panel for external cooling fan and install the panel where it can be exchanged externally.
(4) Drill mounting holes for external cooling fan and air outlet on heat exchanger mounting panel.

Fig. 3.6.2(b) Mounting methods of heat exchanger for CRT/MDI

16
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Horizontal type CRT/MDI and


Horizontal type CRT/MDI only machine operator’s panel Vertical type CRT/MDI only

Inside Outside

Side view

CRT/MDI
Heat exchanger
Min Min Min
370 35 370 35 370 35

Top view

Refer to these figures for allocation of CRT/MDI and heat exchanger

Fig. 3.6.2(c) Allocation of 14″color CRT/MDI and heat exchanger

17
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.6.3

     
 
 

3.6.3.1 The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinet
Installation of small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, and
heat–efficient unit. Because the fan is built–in, it is used simply by
installing it, performing the ”panel cut’ operation.

Specifications Installation format Installation type in board


Fan Cooling ability (W/°C) 9 (50Hz when operating)
specifications
Voltage (V) 200VAC
Frequency (Hz) 50 60
Rating current (A) 0.28 0.24
Rating input (W) 28 26
Weight (kg) 4
Color Munsell signal N1.5

Order specifications Heat exchanger A02B–0094–C901


Remarks
 A filter is installed on the outside air inhalation side.
 The installation board thickness is the standard 1.6 t.
 When a fan motor and filter are necessary for maintenance, prepare
them separately.
Fan motor specifications
A90L–0001–0219#A
Filter specifications
A250–0689–X004
 If the heat exchanger is installed near the CRT, screen distortion may
occur due to magnetic flux leakage from the fan motor.

18
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

External dimensions

17.5
Power
source AIR
terminal M4 FLOW

6–6 dia.

190
Earth
terminal
M4
External
fan unit
415
Internal
190 fan unit

AIR
FLOW
17.5

6 216 6 22.4 85
22.4
226
1.6

(Installation board thickness)


3
8.5

199

19
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Panel cut dimensions

180

2.5
187.5
190
HOLE

175
190
3–5 dia.

6–6 dia. or stud welder (M4)

214

20
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Installation method Please install the heat exchanger by the following sequence:
1 Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit. (Fig.
1)
Detach the external fan unit installation screws A (2 pieces), take out
the unit from the main unit by sliding it down, and detach the earth
cable and the power cable to the fan. Also detach the installation screw
B (1 piece).
2 Install the heat exchanger main unit in the installation section which
has been panel cut. (Fig. 2)
When fastening down the heat exchanger main unit with the screws,
first, temporarily secure the panel and the heat exchanger main unit
with the installation screw B, which was taken out in 1). After that,
secure the main unit by the installation screws. In this case, the
external fan unit installation screw holes should be aligned with the
main unit screw holes. (Please provide the installation screws for the
heat exchanger main unit.)
Because this product is composed of plastic, set the value shown
below for the screw tightening torque.
Heat exchanger main unit (M4 screw) : 11 kgf.cm
External fan unit (M3 screw) : 5 kgf.cm
3 Connect the power cable and the earth cable to the external fan unit (the
unit detached in 1), and secure the installation screw A to the main unit
from the outside.
The installation is now complete.

Heat exchanger
main unit

Fan power cable


(detach the connector)
External fan unit

Installation screw B (1) Installation screws A (2)


Earth cable (if the installation screw on the
fan side is detached, it can be taken out.) Installation
screw Installation screw B (1)
Installation panel
Fig. 1 Take out the external fan unit from the Fig. 2 Install the heat exchanger main unit and
heat exchanger main unit the external fan unit

21
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.7 The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
ACTION AGAINST designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
NOISE measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the
CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground
loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.

3.7.1 The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
Separating Signal following table:
Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A sepa-
Secondary AC power line rately (Note 1) from groups B
and C,
C or cover grou
group A with an
AC/DC power lines (containing electromagnetic shield (Note 2).
A the power lines for the servo and
spindle motors) See Section 3.7.4 and connect
sspark
ark killers or diodes with the
AC/DC solenoid solenoid and relay.y
AC/DC relay
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC sole-
noid and relay.
DC relay (24VDC) Bind the cables in group B sepa-
rately from group A, or cover
DI/DO cable between the CNC gro p B with
group ith an electromagnetic
B shield.
and power magnetics cabinet
Separate group B as far from
DI/DO cable between the CNC G
Group C as possible.
ibl
and machine It is more desirable to cover
group B with the shield.
Cable between the CNC and ser- Bind the cables in group C sepa-
vo amplifier rately from group A, or cover
Cable for position and velocity gro p C with
group ith an electromagnetic
feedback shield.

Cable between the CNC and Separate group


gro p C as far from
spindle amplifier Group B as possible.

Cable for the position coder Be sure to


B t perform
f shield
hi ld pro-
cessing in Section 3.7.5.
375
Cable for the manual pulse gen-
C
erator
Cable between the CNC and the
CRT/MDI
RS–232–C and RS–422 interface
cable
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with
the shield

22
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Notes
1. The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2. The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.

Cabinet

Spindle Servo Control


amp. amp. unit
Cable of group B, C

Duct
To operator’s
panel,
motor, etc.

Cable of group A Section

Group A Group B, C

Cover

23
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.7.2 The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
Ground  Signal ground system (SG)
The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V) of the
electrical signal system.
 Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames,
cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables between
the units are connected.
 System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.

Signal ground system


Frame ground system
Power Servo CNC System ground system
magnet- amplifier control
ics unit
unit Operator’s
panel
Machine
tool

Power
magnetics
cabinet

Distribution board

 



   Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at only one
 
   place in the CNC control unit.
 The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100 ohms or
less (class 3 grounding).
 The system ground cable must have enough cross–sectional area to
safely carry the accidental current flow into the system ground when
an accident such as a short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the cross–sectional area of the AC power cable
or more.)
 Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system ground
wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.

24
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

3.7.3 Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
Connecting the Signal ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.
The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the
Ground (SG) of the control unit.
Control Unit

Control unit

PCB

Signal
ground
(SG) SG
M4
(Only thread
hole) M3
M3
(With thread)

Ground cable
Wire with a sectional
area 2mm2 or more

Ground cable

Ground plate of System ground


the cabinet

25
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.7.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.

  
  
  

  Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This


type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
 The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
I2 I2
2) Capacitance (C) : ∼ (µF)
10 20

I : Current at stationary state of the coil

R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer

AC Spark killer
relay

Motor

Spark killer

Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.

Note) Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminators


clamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp
rising edge.

Diode (used for direct–current circuits)

– +
Diode
Use a diode which can withstand a
DC relay voltage up to two times the applied
voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.

26
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

3.7.5 The CNC cables that require shielding should be clamped by the method
Cable Clamp and shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and
proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation,
Shield Processing follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :

Ground plate

Cable

Metal fittings
for clamp

40 mm to 80 mm

Fig. 3.7.5(a) Cable clamp (1)

27
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

ÇÇ
Machine side
installation

ÇÇ board

ÇÇ
Control unit

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Metal fittings
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
for clamp
Shield cover

Fig. 3.7.5(b) Cable clamp (2)

Prepare ground plate like the following figure.

Ground terminal
(grounded)

Hole for securing metal fitting clamp

Mount screw hole

Fig. 3.7.5(c) Ground plate

For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.

28
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Ground
8mm plate

12mm

20mm

Fig. 3.7.5(d) Ground plate holes

(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.

Max. 55mm

28mm

6mm

17mm

Fig. 3.7.5(e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp

Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp


A02B–0083–K301 (5 pieces)

29
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.8
CONTROL UNIT
3.8.1 Printed circuit boards are mounted in a rack equipped with several slots.
Configuration and There are three types of printed circuit boards depending on the models
as shown in Fig.3.8.1 (a), Fig.3.8.1 (b) and Fig.3.8.1 (c).
Installation of the
Control Unit
Background OSI Data Control unit HSSB
graphic Ethernet server graphic interface
board board board board board

Back- Commu- Data Graphic High–


ground nication server selection speed
graphic CPU function function serial bus
CPU interface
(For Super
CAP M)

MMC RISC Loader I/O card Option–3 Option–2 Option–1 Main CPU Power
board board control board board board board supply unit
board

MMC–IV High Loader DI/DO CAP CPU 2–path Commu- CNC CPU ON/OFF
CPU precision control (40/40) (CAP–II) control nication control
contour CPU (80/56) SUB CPU CPU
control (104/72) (Remote
Hard disk 64–bit 4 axes (156/112) PMC CPU 4/6–axes buffer,l 4/6–axes Power
drive RISC CPU control (PMC–RC3 control DNC1, control supply unit
Floppy disk Loader High– ( –RC4) Spindle I/F DNC2) Spindle I/F AI or BI
drive PMC speed skip High– CRT/MDI
Printer DI/DO speed skip I/O Link
Keyboard Analog I/O PMC–
RS–232–C RB5/RB6
RS–232–C
2
Memory
card I/F

ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Opotion Basic system

ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Main Power
CPU supply

2 slot
3 slot
4 slot
6 slot
8 slot

Fig. 3.8.1 (a) Configuration of Control Unit (Series 16, Series 160)

30
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Main CPU Power


board supply
unit
CNC CPU Power
supply unit
4–axes con- C
trol
Spindle I/F DI/DO
CRT/MDI (40/40)
(Graphic) (80/56)
I/O Link (104/72)
PMC–RB3
RS–232–C
2
Memory High
card I/F speed skip

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Basic system

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Main Power
CPU supply
I/O
Card

2 slot

Fig.3.8.1 (b) Configuration of Control Unit (Series 16, Series 18)

31
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Control unit HSSB


graphic interface
board board

Graphic High–
selection speed
function serial bus
interface

Background MMC Loader I/O card Option 3 Option–2 Option–1 Main CPU Power
graphic board control board board board board supply unit
board board

Back- MMC–IV Loader DI/DO PMC CPU 2–path Commu- CNC CPU ON/OFF
ground CPU control (40/40) (PMC–RC3) control nication control
graphic CPU (80/56) SUB CPU CPU
CPU (104/72) (Remote
(For Super Hard disk 4 axes (156/112) CAP CPU 4/6–axes buffer, 4/6–axes Power
CAP M) drive control control DNC1, control supply unit
Floppy disk Loader High– Spindle I/F DNC2) Spindle I/F AI or BI
drive PMC speed skip High– CRT/MDI
Printer DI/DO speed skip I/O Link
Keyboard Analog I/O PMC–
RS–232–C RB5/RB6
RS–232–C
2
Memory
card I/F

ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Option Basic system

ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

Main Poer
CPU supply

2 slot
3 slot
4 slot
6 slot

Fig 3.8.1 (c) Configuration of Control Unit (Series 18, Series 180)

32
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

The rack consists of a plastic box, fan motors and a backplane PCB. Since
the rack is provided with built-in fan motors, it does not require the
external air flow conditions described in Section 3.5. The air comes into
the rack from the bottom and goes out through the fan motor, which is
located on the top of the rack. Space as shown in below must be reserved
not to disturb the air flow (, )
The backplane PCB, which is located on the rear side of the rack,
interconnects the PCBs installed in the rack.
AIR FLOW

 

50

50

 

172

33
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.8.2 Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS
Battery for Memory memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is backed
up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The
Backup above data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup
battery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can
maintain the contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message ”BAT”
blinks on the CRT display and the battery alarm signal is output to the
PMC. When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as
possible. In general, the battery can be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer
be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes
system alarm 910 (SRAM parity alarm) to occur because the contents of
memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing
the battery.
The power to the control unit must be turned on when the battery is
replaced. If the battery is disconnected when the power is turned off, the
contents of memory are lost.
Observe the following precautions for lithium batteries:

Note
If an unspecified battery is used, it may explode.
Replace the battery only with the specified battery
 A02B–0200–K102 for power supply AI and BI.
 A02B–0177–K106 for power supply C.

Dispose of used batteries as follows:


 Small quantities
Discharge the batteries and dispose of them as ordinary nonflammable
garbage.
 Large quantities
Consult FANUC.

34
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Replacing the Battery

Procedure for replacing the battery

1 Use a lithium battery (ordering drawing number:


A02B–0222–K102 for power supply AI/BI;
A02B–0177–K106 for power supply C)
2 Turn on the power of CNC.
3 Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power supply
unit. The case can be removed easily by holding the top and bottom of
it and pulling.
4 Remove the connector from the battery.
5 Replace the battery and reconnect the connector.
6 Install the battery case.
7 Turn off the power of CNC.

BATTERY

Power
supply Cable side
unit connector

Battery
unit PCB side
connector

Battery
Front panel of
Power supply unit

35
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

3.9 Following diagram shows the grid of connector location.


Control board may not have all connectors as shown above.
CABLE LEAD–IN For actual connector layout of each board, please see the connector layout
DIAGRAM diagrams next page or later.

72 12.7

12.7 8

22.86

12.7 11

Power
44 supply
unit
52 60 52 60 (80) 172
Unit : mm
Fig. 3.9(a) Cable lead–in diagram

36
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Connector layout of
power supply unit

Power supply unit AI and


BI
70

CP1

F1

80

CP2, 3

380

115

CP4

CP5, 6 35

F3 F4

80

Unit : mm

37
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Connector layout of I/O


card (Power supply unit
C is integrated)

I/O

Connector No. of I/O card


Function Abr. no pins A B C

POS.1 1 HIGH SPEED HDI JA5B 20   


SKIP SIGNAL
(RIGHT)
2 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DO–1 C54 50   
(C74)
(LEFT)
3 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 DO–2 C55 50  
3 2 (C75)

5 4
4 24V OUTPUT DC OUT CP1B   

5 24V OUTPUT DC IN CP1A   

6 BATTERY CP8   
6

(RIGHT)
7 DIGITAL INPUT 1 DI–1 C50 50   
(C70)
8 7 (LEFT)
8 DIGITAL INPUT 2 DI–2 C51 50  
(C71)

10
(RIGHT)
9 DIGITAL INPUT 3 DI–3 C52 20 
9
(C72)
(LEFT)
10 DIGITAL INPUT 4 DI–4 C53 20 

NO. OF I/O ON I/O CARD

NOTE) MARK  SHOWS THAT


INPUT OUTPUT
THE CONNECTOR IS
MOUNTED.
A 40 40
B 80 56
C 104 72

38
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Connector layout of
main CPU board

Upper line Lower line


Function marking marking

LED INDICATORS STATUS/ALARM

POS.1 CRT DISPLAY CRT JA1

2 MDI MDI JA2

3 SERIAL PORT 1 R232-1 JD5A

4 SERIAL PORT 2 R232-2 JD5B

5 MPG MPG JA3

6 SERIAL I/O LINK IOLINK JD1A

7 SERIAL SPINDLE SPDL-1 JA7A

8 ANALOG OUT A-OUT1 JA8A

9 APC BATTERY APCBAT JA4A

10 SERVO AMP 1 AMP 1 JS1A


(SERVO1)
11 SERVO AMP 2 AMP 2 JS2A
(SERVO2)
12 SERVO AMP 3 AMP 3 JS3A
(SERVO3)
13 SERVO AMP 4 AMP 4 JS4A
(SERVO4)
14 SERVO AMP5 AMP1 JS5A
(SERVO5)
15 SERVO AMP6 AMP2 JS6A
(SERVO6)
16 LINEAR SCALE1 SCALE1 JF21

17 LINEAR SCALE2 SCALE2 JF22

18 LINEAR SCALE3 SCALE3 JF23

19 LINEAR SCALE4 SCALE4 JF24

20 SERVO CHECK SV–CHK JA26

21

39
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Connector layout of
option–1A board

Upper line Lower line


Function marking marking

LED INDICATORS STATUS/ALARM

POS.1

2 RS232C PORT3 R232-3 JD5C

3 RS422 PORT1 R422-1 JD6A

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

40
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Connector layout of
option 2 board
(Series 16/160,
Series 18/180)

Series 16/160 Series 18/180


(6 axes) (4 axes)

Marks on Connector
Function Upper Lower

LED INDICATORS STATUS ALARM

POS.1

5 HIGH SPEED HDI JA5

6 ANALOG INPUT A–IN JA6

7 SERIAL SPINDLE SPDL–2 JA7B

8 ANALOG OUTPUT A–OUT2 JA8B

9 APC BATTERY APCBAT JA4B

10 SERVO AMP 1 AMP1 JS1A–2

11 SERVO AMP 2 AMP2 JS2A–2

12 SERVO AMP 3 AMP3 JS3A–2

13 SERVO AMP 4 AMP4 JS4A–2

14 SERVO AMP 5 AMP5 JS5A–2

15 SERVO AMP 6 AMP6 JS6A–2

16 LINEAR SCALE 1 SCALE1 JF21–2

17 LINEAR SCALE 2 SCALE2 JF22–2

18 LINEAR SCALE 3 SCALE3 JF23–2

19 LINEAR SCALE 4 SCALE4 JF24–2

20 SERVO CHECK SV–CHK JA26

21

41
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Connector layout of
option–3 board

For CAP function With PMC–RC


only function

Upper line Lower line


Function marking marking

LED INDICATORS STATUS ALARM

POS.1

6 SERIAL I/O LINK IOLINK JD1A

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

42
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Connector layout of I/O


Card

I/O Card A I/O Card B I/O Card C I/O Card D


DI/DO=40/40 DI/DO=80/56 DI/DO=104/72 DI/DO=156/120

I/O I/O I/O I/O

Connector
Function Marking
number
R R R R (RIGHT)
OUTPUT 1 DO-1 C54
(C74)
M M M M (CENTER)
OUTPUT 2 DO-2 C55
(C75)
L L L L (LEFT)
OUTPUT 3 DO-3 C58
(C78)

R R R R (RIGHT)
INPUT 1 DI-1 C50
(CENTER) (C70)
M M M M

INPUT 2 DI-2 C51


L L L L (LEFT) (C71)

INPUT 5 DI-5 C56


(C76)
R R R R (RIGHT)
INPUT 3 DI-3 C52
M M M M (CENTER) (C72)
INPUT 4 DI-4 C53
L L L L (LEFT) (C73)

INPUT 6 DI-6 C57


(C77)

43
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Connector layout of
loader control board
(Series 16/160,
Series 18/180)
Marks on Connector
Function Upper Lower

LED INDICATOR STATUS/ALARM

POS.1 BRAKE DRIVE BRAKE CNBK


OUTPUT
2 EMERGENCY STOP ESP CNPW
CONTROL
3

4 OPERATOR’S TP CNTP
PANEL INTER
5 FACE WF CNWF

6 WORKPIECE FEEDER

7 SERIAL I/O LINK IOLNK JD1A

8 SERVO CHECK CHECK JA8C

MEMORY CARD CNMC

10 SERVO AMP 1 AMP1 JS1A

11 SERVO AMP 2 AMP2 JS2A

12 SERVO AMP 3 AMP3 JS3A

13 SERVO AMP 4 AMP4 JS4A

14

15

16

17 DI/DO RDIO CRM1

18

19

20

21

44
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Connector layout of
MMC–IV

Marks on Connector
Function upper lower

LED INDICATORS STATUS ALARM

POS.1 NC VIDEO SIGNAL NC CRT JA1B


INPUT
2 VIDEO SIGNAL CRT JA1A
OUTPUT
3 SERIAL PORT 1 RS232–1 JD5F

4 SERIAL PORT 2 RS232–2 JD5G

5 LCD TUNING LCD ADJUST

7 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE FDD JD8

10 PARALLEL PORT CENTRO JD9

11 EXTENDED EX KEY JD21


KEYBOARD
12

13 FULL KEYBOARD KEYBOARD CD32A

14

15

16

17 MEMORY CARD MEN CARD CNA

18 (PCMCIA)

19

20

21 MOUSE MOUSE CD32B

45
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Connector layout of
HSSB interface board

HSSB Marks on Connector


Function Upper Lower Left Right

LED display STATUS

Rotary switch SW

LED display AL 2 1

High–speed serial bus interface HSSB COP7

Mini–slot interface JNAM

46
B–62753EN/01 3. INSTALLATION

Connector layout of
control unit graphic
board

Marks on connector
Function Upper Lower Left Right

Video signal output CRT JA1A OUT

Rotary switch for tuning LCD LCD ADJ.

Video signal input CRT JA1B IN

Setting pin for tuning LCD HS AB012

LCD pin for tuning LCD PHS 01234

LEDdisplay STATUS S1 S2 S4 S3

LEDdisplay ALARM A1 A2 A4 A3

Mini–slot interface JNA

47
3. INSTALLATION B–62753EN/01

Connector layout of Data


server PCB

ÅÅ Function
Marks on connector
Upper Lower

ÅÅ
ÅÅ
LED INDICATORS STATUS ALARM

ÅÅ FUSE F1 2.0A

ÅÅ Ethernet interface AUI CD27

ÅÅ Integrated HDD access LED HDD

48
B–62753EN/01 4. TOTAL CONNECTION

4 TOTAL CONNECTION

49
4. TOTAL CONNECTION B–62753EN/01

Series 16/160/18/180 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

Note: Refer to item 7.1.1 for CRT/MDI connection.


When power supply unit A1/B1 is used :

50
B–62753EN/01 4. TOTAL CONNECTION

51
4. TOTAL CONNECTION B–62753EN/01

52
B–62753EN/01 4. TOTAL CONNECTION

53
4. TOTAL CONNECTION B–62753EN/01

WHEN POWER SUPPLY C IS USED.

Note: Refer to item 7.1.1 for CRT/MDI connection.

54
B–62753EN/01 4. TOTAL CONNECTION

55
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION B–62753EN/01

5  
   

56
B–62753EN/01 5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION

5.1
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
PANEL LAYOUT

CP1 (INPUT 200–240VAC)

Power supply unit 3 G


AI/BI
F1 (AC INPUT FUSE) 2 S

1 R

CP2 (AC OUTPUT)


CP3 (AC OUTPUT)
3 G 3 G

2 200B 2 200B

1 200A 1 200A

Key location

CP8 (BATTERY) PIL (PILOT LAMP)


1 +VB ALM (ALARM LAMP)

CP4 (POWER CONTROL)


2 0V
6–pin connector
B3 FB A3 COM

CP5 (+24V OUTPUT) B2 FA A2 OFF

3 B1 AL A1 ON

2 0V CP6 (+24E OUTPUT)


3
1 +24V
2 0V

1 +24E

F3 (+24V FUSE AI 3.2A) F4 (+24E FUSE 5A)


BI 5.0A

Note
Connector compatibility
CP1
CP2 COMPATIBLE
CP3
INCOMPATIBLE (Key groove on
CP4 the connector prevents erroneous
CP5 connection)
CP6

57
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION B–62753EN/01

Power supply unit C

I/O
PSU

POS.1
Fuse (DC input) 7.5A

PIL (Pilot lamp)

CPIA DC input

1 +24V

2 0V

3
key location

CPIB (DC putput)

1 +24V

2 0V

58
B–62753EN/01 5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION

5.2
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
CONNECTION

POWER SUPPLY UNIT (AI/BI)


AMP JAPAN, LTD.
CP1 (INPUT 200–240VAC) 1–178128–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
3 G
2 S 200–240VAC
1 R 1φ, 50Hz/60Hz

AMP JAPAN, LTD. ON


OFF
2–178129–6 (Housing) POWER ON
1–175218–2 (Contact) POWER OFF
CP4 POWER CONTROL) COM
B3 FB A3 COM ALARM IN
B2 FA A2 OFF AL
B1 AL A1 ON FA ALARM OUT
FB
AMP JAPAN, LTD.
CP2 (AC OUTPUT) 1–178128–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact) 200VAC POWER FOR
3 G 9” COLOR CRT
2 200B 14” COLOR CRT
1 200A 9” MONOCHROME PDP
AMP JAPAN, LTD.
CP3 (AC OUTPUT) 1–178128–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
3 G EX) SERVO MAIN POWER CONTROL
2 200B
1 200A

U 1
V 2 SERVO AMP.
REGULATOR W A
MCC
*) The power supply capacity suits CP2 and CP3
is 2.5 volts or less.
AMP JAPAN, LTD.
CP5 (+24V OUTPUT) 2–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
3 9” MONOCHROME CRT
2 0V 8.4” COLOR LCD
1 +24V 9.5” COLOR LCD

*) The power supply capacity is 2A or less.

AMP JAPAN, LTD.


CP6 (+24E OUTPUT) 1–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
3
2 0V FOR OPERATOR’S PANEL
CONNECTION UNIT, etc.
1 +24E
*) The power supply capacity is 3A or less.

59
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION B–62753EN/01

(1) CP1
The AC input connector for the control unit. The AC input
specifications are as follows:
R and S: 200 to 240 VAC + 10%/–15% 1, 50 Hz/60 Hz 3 Hz
G: Grounding (class 3 or better)

Note
The above specifications may be limited depending on the
device powered from CP2 or CP3.

(2) CP2 and CP3


The connectors for AC outputs for which power on/off is synchronized
with the power on/off of the control unit.
The AC output specifications are the same as the AC input for CP1.
The AC input specifications for CP1 may be limited depending on the
AC input specifications for a device connected to CP2 or CP3.
Example) When a device of 200/220 VAC (which does not accept
240 V) is connected to CP2, the AC input specification
for CP1 is also 200/220 VAC.
The total AC output from CP2 and CP3 is up to 2.5 A.
(3) CP4
The connector for controlling the power. The power–on and
power–off buttons are connected here.
(a) Power on/off (EON, EOF, and COM)
Turns on and off the power to the control unit.

(Time conditions)

T ON T OFF ON
T ON  500 msec
Shorted T OFF  500 msec
Between T OFF ON  5 sec
EON and COM Open

T OFF

Shorted
Between
EOF andCOM Open

(Power is on.) (Power is off.) (Power is on.)

(Contact specifications)
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between the contacts)
Withstand voltage: 100 mA or higher
(The minimum load is 2 mA or lower.)

60
B–62753EN/01 5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION

(b) Alarm input (AL and OFF)


Receives an alarm signal from outside the control unit to turn off
the power to the system. Input a contact signal which is closed
when an alarm occurs.
(Contact specifications)
Withstand voltage: 30 VDC or more (between the contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or more (The minimum load is 1
mA or less.)

(c) Alarm output (FA and FB)


Shorts FA and FB when an abnormality is found in the power
supply unit for the control unit, for example, when the fuse for
direct current output blows or when an excessive voltage or current
is detected at the direct current output. When an alarm input
(between AL and OFF) is closed, FA and FB are also shorted. This
signal is held until the power–off button is pressed or the input
power (AC input of the power supply unit) is turned off. When this
signal is output, the power to the control unit is turned off and the
power–on button is disables.
(Contact ratings) 50 VDC or less
0.5 A or less
50 VAC or less
5 VA or less

(4) CP5
The connector for the +24 VDC power output for the 9″ monochrome
CRT.

(5) CP6
The connector for the +24 VDC power output for the machine
interface I/O (connection unit, operator’s panel connection unit, etc.).
The DC output supplied from CP6 is up to 3 A.

61
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION B–62753EN/01

The power supply unit AI and BI have the power on/off control function.
When an external input unit is used, the power on/off button may not be
connected to the power supply unit. In this case, the following
connection is recommended.
Signals ON, OFF, and COM are wired together. This means that the
power supply unit operates while its AC input power is supplied to CP1.
U, V, W
AMP JAPAN, LTD.
1–178128–3
EXTERNAL
INPUT UNIT ON/OFF-
CP1 (INPUT 200–240VAC)
BUTTON
3 G
2 S 200–240VAC
1 R 1, 50HZ/60HZ

AMP JAPAN, LTD.


CP4 (POWER CONTROL) 2–178129–6
ON
B3 FB A3 COM OFF
B2 FA A2 OFF COM
B1 AL A1 ON
AL
FA
FB

When the input unit PCB A16B-1600-0090 is used as the external input
unit, the power ready signals PA and PB should be wired as follows.
Fuse
U, V, W
Servo 3–phase
input
ON/OFF controlled
200/220VAC, 1
Not to be MCC
200/220VAC, 1 used 0.3A
To servo transformer
In case of standard
or 14″color CRT/ TP1
EXR
EMG OUT1
EMG OUT2

EXS
R
S

MDI panel, the ON/


OFF buttons are
mounted on MDI
panel. R, S, G CNC
CP2
ON CP1
EON (6P, Black)
OFF
EOF
COM
FA CP2-1 R CP1-1
FB CP2-2 S CP1-2
TP2 CP2-3 G CP1-3

Input unit shown in A16B-1600-0090


dotted line frame CP2-5 PA
TP1, TP2 .... M4 screw
terminal ON/OFF controlled 200/220VAC CP2-6 PB

62
B–62753EN/01 5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION

5.3 This chapter describes 24V input power when the power integrated I/O
card is used.
24V INPUT POWER
SOURCE
Turning ON and OFF
power of CONTROL UNIT

5.3.1 Supply power of 24VDC to the control unit from an external source.
Power Supply for the Switches for turning on and off the power to the control unit may not be
necessary.
control unit The main circuit breaker ((1) in Fig.5.3.1 (a)) can be used to turn on and
off the power to the entire machine.
When a dedicated power switch is necessary, the switch circuit must be
installed at (2) in Fig.5.3.1 (a)).

Main Magnetic AC Line Servo Servo


breaker contactor filter converter inverter CNC
Input
AC200V 3
200VAC

For control line


(1) 1
200VAC

24VDC 24VDC
input Output

(2) ON/OFF circuit

External 9″CRT
24VDC

9″PDP

ON OFF COM
Fig. 5.3.1 (a)

63
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION B–62753EN/01

 EXAMPLE OF ON/OFF For example, ON/OFF circuit is as shown in Fig. 5.3.1 (b). Select the
CIRCUIT circuit in consideration of its capacity.

R R AC OUTPUT
AC INPUT F1 Ic1 200V
200V (FOR PLASMA
VS1 SK
50/60 Hz DISPLAY)
S S
F2 Ic2
G G
Ic3
+24V +24V

DC OUTPUT
DC INPUT 24V 4A
24V 4A RY1 LC1 LC2 LC3 (Series 16/18)

ry1
0V 0V

ry1
Meaning of symbols

OFF COM ON
SURGE SPARK
ABSORBER KILLER

DIODE FUSE
POWER ON/OFF SWITCH

OFF ON RELAY RELAY


COIL CONTACT

B CONTACT A CONTACT

Fig. 5.3.1 (b)

64
B–62753EN/01 5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION

5.3.2 Turn on the power to each unit in the following order or all at the same
Procedure for Turning time.
on the power
1 Power supplies (200 VAC) for the entire machine
2 Power supplies (24 VDC) for slave I/O devices connected
using the FANUC I/O Link (such as the I/O Unit–MODEL A)
3 Power supplies (24 VDC) for the control unit and CRT unit
(200 VAC for the PDP unit)

Do not disconnect the battery for memory backup (3 VDC) or the battery
for the separate absolute pulse coders (6 VDC) regardless of whether the
power to the control unit is on or off. If batteries are disconnected when
the power to the control unit is turned off, current data stored in the control
unit for the pulse coders, parameters, programs etc, are lost.
Make sure that the power to the control unit is on when replacing batteries.
See Section 3.8.2 for how to replace the batteries for memory backup.

5.3.3 Turn off the power to each unit in the following order or all at the same
Procedure for Turning time.
off the Power 1 Power supplies (24VDC) for slave I/O devices connected
using the FANUC I/O Link (such as the I/O Unit–MODEL A)
2 Power supplies (24 VDC) for the control unit and CRT unit
(200 VAC for the PDP unit)
3 Power supplies (200 VAC) for the entire machine

Motors cannot be controlled when the power is turned off or momentarily


interrupted. Take appropriate action on the machine side when necessary.
For example, when the tool is moved along a vertical axis, apply brakes
to prevent the axis from falling. Apply a brake that clamps the motor when
the servo is not operating or the motor is not rotating. Release the clamp
only when the motor is rotating. When the servo axis cannot be controlled
when the power is turned off or momentarily interrupted, clamp the servo
motor. In this case, the axis may fall before the relay for clamping starts
operating. The designer should make sure if the distance results in trouble.

65
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTION B–62753EN/01

5.4 Supply the power for the control unit from the external 24 VDC power
supply.
CABLE FOR POWER
SUPPLY TO
CONTROL UNIT Control unit External power source
CP1A
1 +24V 24 VDC stabilized
2 0V power supply 24
3 VDC ± 10%

Cable

CP1A
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact) External power
Select a terminal
+24V (1) that meets the one
0V (2) for external power
source

Recommended cable specification : A02B–0214–K830 (5m)


(Crimp terminal of M3 is equipped with the cable on the side of external
power source)

66
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6 


  
  
 
 

67
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.1 The CNC can be combined with the units shown in the table below as I/O
units for the machine interface.
GENERAL The I/O units can be classified into two types: the I/O units tailored to the
FANUC I/O Link, and the built-in I/O unit. The I/O units for the FANUC
I/O Link are installed separately from the control unit, and connected with
the control unit using the dedicated serial FANUC I/O Link.
As shown in the figure below, two or more units can be installed
separately. By placing the interface unit and connection unit for the
operator’s panel near the operator’s panel, an operator’s panel that
inputs/outputs many signals can be interfaced easily.
The FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A is a modular-type I/O unit. It selects
necessary modules from various I/O modules provided by FANUC
according to the application and uses them as one external unit. The
FANUC I/O Link transfers data between the control unit and such an
external unit at a high speed. The states of the input signals from the
machine are transferred to the control unit at regular intervals. The states
of the output signals from the control unit are transferred to external units
at regular intervals. (Note that this manual covers only part of the uses
that the FANUC I/O Link has. For example, although it can be used for
connecting the 1-axis CNC FANUC Power Mate or cell controller
FANUC F-D Mate, this manual does not mention it. This is because the
purpose of this manual is to describe the I/O units having machine
interface.)
The built-in I/O unit is an I/O card to be inserted into a slot in the control
unit. Although the built-in I/O unit is less flexible than the FANUC I/O
Unit MODEL A, it is available in four types depending on the number of
DI/DO points.
Table 6.1 Machine interface I/O
Type Name DI/DO points
FANUC I/O Link FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Max. 256/256 per group
com atible I/O
compatible Max.
Max 1024/1024 in total
Machine operator’s panel
interface unit

Operator’s panel connection unit

Built–in I/O I/O Card Max. 156/120 per card


Up to two cards can be
used.

Cautions
1. To turn off the power to the motor, input the emergency stop
signal to both the CNC control unit and servo system
simultaneously. For details of applying the emergency stop
signal to the servo system, refer to FANUC CONTROL
MOTOR AMPLIFIER  Series (B–65162E/02).
2. Input signals X008.0 to X008.7 (X1008.0 to X1008.7 when
using the built–in I/0 card) must be connected in a sink
layout, because these signals include the emergency stop
signal.

68
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.2
CONNECTION OF THE
FANUC I/O Link

6.2.1 The CNC has two JD1A interface connectors for the FANUC I/O Link.
General Only one of the two connectors is selected according to the type of PMC,
and both are not used at the same time. For a system with a PMC-RB, the
I/O Link is connected to the main CPU board. For a system with a
PMC-RC, the I/O Link is connected to the option 3 board. Starting at this
point (main CPU board or option 3 board), the I/O Link is connected with
the I/O units and interface unit of the operator’s panel sequentially in a
daisy-chain manner.
In the I/O Link there are the master station and its slave stations. The
master is the control unit of the CNC, and the slaves are the I/O unit and
interface unit for the operator’s panel. The slaves are divided into groups,
and up to 16 groups can be connected to one I/O Link. A maximum of
two base I/O units can be connected as a group. The operator’s panel
connection unit and interface unit for the operator’s panel are each
counted as one group.
The two connectors of the I/O link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units (that have I/O Link function). A cable is always
connected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1B
of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be connected with a
terminator.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on the next page. Use the figures
when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.

Main CPU board FANUC I/O Link


JD1A I/O=256/256 or less per group
(With PMC–RB)
I/O=1024/1024 or less in total I/O Link

Option 3 board FANUC I/O Unit - MODEL A  2 max


JD1A
(With PMC-RC) Base unit 1 Base unit 2
JD1B
Group Magnetic
Series16 JD1A
#0 circuit
Control unit
JD1B Group
JD1A #1

JD1B Group
JD1A #2

Max. 16
group
JD1B
Operator’s panel Machine
JD1A operator’s
Group panel
#3 Connection unit or machine
operator’s panel interface unit

Fig. 6.2.1 I/O Link connection diagram

69
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.2.2
Connection of FANUC
Control unit or preceding
I/O Link by Electric slave unit I/O unit MODEL A
Cable JD1A JD1B
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–E20LMD) JD1A
(PCR–E20LMD)
1 SIN 11 0V 1 SIN 11 0V
JD1B
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13  Next
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
slave
5 15 5 15
6 16 16
unit
6
7 17 7 17
8 18  8 18 
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20  10 20 

+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O link adapter. They are not necessary
when connecting with a metal cable.
A line for the +5V terminal is not required when the Optical I/O Link
Adapter is not used.
Cable wiring

1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V

Shield

Grounding Plate

Recommended Cable Material


A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG×10pair)

70
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.2.3 The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
Connection of FANUC with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O link adapter.
I/O Link Optical Fiber Note : In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
Cable
 When the cable is more than 10 meters long.
 When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is
impossible to connect the cabinets with a grounding wire of
5.5 mm2 or thicker.
 When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong
noise; for example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source beside
the cable such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for
a long distance in parallel with the cable.

External dimension of
optical link adapter
66.0
connector JD1 for
unit connecting 40.0 4–M3

Optical connector
COP1
45.0

FANUC

7.0

Weight of optical link Main body : Approx. 100 g. 18.0


adapter

Connection
 Connection diagram

Unit Unit
JD1 JD1

JD1A JD1B
COP1 COP1
Connecting Optical Connecting
cable between cable cable between
unit Optical I/O Optical I/O unit
link adapter link adapter

71
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

 Interunit connecting
cables

01 SIN 11 0V Unit side Adapter side


JD1A,JD1B JD1
02 *SIN 12 0V
03 SOUT 13 0V SIN(01) (03)SOUT
04 *SOUT 14 0V *SIN(02) (04)*SOUT
05 15 0V SOUT(03) (01)SIN
06 16 0V *SOUT(04) (02)*SIN
07 17 +5V(09) (09)+5V
08 18 +5V +5V(18) (18)+5V
09 +5V 19 +5V(20) (20)+5V
10 20 +5V 0V(11) (11)0V
0V(12) (12)0V
0V(13) (13)0V
0V(14) (14)0V
0V(15) (15)0V
0V(16) (16)0V

 Recommended connector for cable side :


PCR–E20FS (made by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
 Recommended cable (wire material) : A66L–0001–0284#10P
 Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)
 Optical cable  Specification : A66L – 6001 – 0009
(Make sure to use one with this specification)
 Cable length: Max. 200 m
Power source  Power voltage : 4.75V to 5.25V (at the receiving end)
 Consumption current : 200mA
Installation conditions  The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it with
the CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
 Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical link adapter.
 The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to mount
it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact with other
circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When mounting the optical
link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an L–type fitting using the case
fixing screws (M3) of the optical link adapter.

L fitting

Required parts For making up an I/O link using the optical link adapter, the following
parts are necessary:
 Optical I/O link adapter 2
 Interunit connecting cable 2
 Optical cable 1

72
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3 The FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A (“I/O Unit”) is a modular–type I/O


unit. It interfaces the Series 16 with the machine when connected to the
CONNECTION OF THE control unit via the I/O Link. One I/O unit can be configured by mounting
FANUC I/O the I/O modules required for either the 5– or 10–slot base unit. A variety
Unit–MODEL A of I/O modules are provided so appropriate modules can be selected
according to the use, points, voltage level, current capacity, and signal
specifications. See Section 6.3.9 for further information.

6.3.1
Structure of FANUC Base Unit ABU05A(5 slots) or ABU10A(10 slots)
I/O Unit–MODEL A
I/F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Various I/O modules (Up to 10 modules)


Interface module AIF01A or AIF01B

AIF01A is used for connection to FANUC I/O Link


AIF01B expands I/O Units in the same group.

6.3.2
Outer Dimensions
A (80) 142

130
90

B
20

ø5 (mounting hole)

A B

For 5–slot base unit (ABU05A) 253 238

For 10–slot base unit (ABU10A) 430 415

73
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.3.3 Interface modules and various types of I/O modules can be mounted to
Mounting and and dismounted from the base unit easily as shown below.
Dismounting Modules

Mounting

1 Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upper side
of the base unit.
2 Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.
3 Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopper
in the lower side of the module stops.

Dismounting

1 Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of the module.
2 Push the module upwards.

74
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.4
Connection Diagram

Control unit

JD1A
Terminator TX

K1X I/O Unit–A I/O Unit–A


AIF01A AIF01B

JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32

24VDC 24VDC
K2X
K1X
AIF01A AIF01B

JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2

Max. CP32 PC32


16 ⋅⋅⋅
group 24VDC 24VDC
K2X
K1X AIF01A AIF01B

JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32

24VDC 24VDC
K2X

Notes
1. Number of I/O Units and connecting method are restricted
depending on the allocation of the I/O points.
See 6.2 “Connection of FANUC I/O Link” and 6.3.11
“Number of I/O points for the I/O Unit–A”.
2. Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the optical
I/O link adapter.
Refer to item 6.2.3.

75
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.3.5 Connect the following power source to the connector CP32 of the
Connecting Input interface module (AIF01A or AIF01B).
Power Source  Voltage : 24VDC±10%
 Current : Determine from Table 6.3.6.

BURNDY JAPAN, LTD. tripolar connector (Brown)


Housing : SMS3PNS–5
Contact : RC16M–SCT3

AIF01A/AIF01B
CP32
1 +24V
2 GND 24VDC
3

Caution
Turn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when the
power for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power is
turned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFF
as well.

ON
Power for the
master device OFF

Power for the ON


I/O unit
OFF

t : more than –500ms


(Turn ON of the power for I/O unit can be late 500ms or less.)

76
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.6  Ground the base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A) by its grounding terminal
Grounding
Base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A)

M4 Screw
terminal

 When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in section 6.3.4) runs
between different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with a
grounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.
Table 6.3.6 Required current of each module

Required current (mA) of +24V


Mod le name
Module
A B
AIF01A 50
AIF01B 50
AID32A 20+0.5 >n 30+7.5 >n
AID32B 20+0.5 >n 30+7.5 n
AID16C 5
AID16D 5
AID32E 5
AID32F 5
AIA16G 5+1.5 n
AOD08C 5+2 n
AOD08D 5+2 n
AOD16C 5+2 n
AOD16D 5+2 n
AOD32C 5+0.5 n
AOD32D 5+0.5 n
AOA05E 5+5.5 n
AOA08E 5+5.5 n
AOA12F 5+4.5 n
AOR08G 5 10 n
AOR16G 5 10 n
AAD04A 5 130

n : Number of the input and output points (for each module) which turn
ON simultaneously
 The current sum requirement for modules used in Column A should
not exceed 500 mA.
 The current sum requirement for modules used in Column B should
not exceed 1500 mA.

77
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.3.7 Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the general
Connecting Signal connection diagram are as follows.
Cables

Cable K1X

Connector HONDA TSUSHIN


CNC or AIF01A KOGYO CO., LTD. AIF01A
PCR–E20FS
JD1A JD1B
1 SIN 11 0V 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 15 5 15
6 16 6 16
7 17 7 17
8 18 8 18
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20

Cable connection

JD1A JD1B

SIN (1) (3) SOUT


SIN (2) (4) *SOUT
SOUT (3) (1) SiN
SOUT (4) (2) *SIN
0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V
0V (13)
(13) 0V
0V (14)
(14) 0V

D Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUT and
*SOUT.
D Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
D Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate of the
cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.
D Maximum cable length: 10 m
D Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.
D Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in the
following cases] :
- When the cable is more than 10 meters long.
- When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is no
appropriate ground wire between the cabinets.
- When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise.

78
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Cable K2X

AIF01A or Connector HONDA TSUSHIN


KOGYO CO., LTD. AIF01B
AIF01B
PCR–E20FS
JD2 JD3
1 S1 11 S5 1 S1 11 S5
2 *S1 12 *S5 2 *S1 12 *S5
3 S2 13 S6 3 S2 13 S6
4 *S2 14 *S6 4 *S2 14 *S6
5 S3 15 0V 5 S3 15 0V
6 *S3 16 0V 6 *S3 16 0V
7 S4 17 ID2 7 S4 17 ID2
8 *S4 18 ID3 8 *S4 18 ID3
9 ID1 19 9 ID1 19
10 20 10 20

Cable connection

JD2 JD3
S1(1) (1)S1
*S1(2) (2)*S1
S2(3) (3)S2
*S2(4) (4)*S2
S3(5) (5)S3
*S3(6) (6)*S3
S4(7)
(7)S4
*S4(8)
(8)*S4
S5(11)
*S5(12) (11)S5
S6(13) (12)*S5
*S6(14) (13)S6
ID1(9) (14)*S6
ID2(17) (9)ID1
ID3(18) (17)ID2
0V(15) (18)ID3
0V(16) (15)0V
(16)0V

 Connect the signals with the same name.


 Make sure to use twisted pair wires for the following signals:
S1 and *S1, S2 and *S2, S3 and *S3
S4 and *S4, S5 and *S5, S6 and *S6
 Do not connect the pins No. 10, No. 19 and No. 20, as they are used
internally.
 Recommended cable material : A66L – 0001 – 0284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
 Maximum cable length : 2 m

79
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Terminator TX

AIF01B
Connector
JD2 HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20FS
1 11
2 12 TRM2
3 13
4 TRM1 14 TRM3
5 15
(a) Terminate the connector
6 16
7 17 JD2 of the last AIF01B in
8 18 a single group with the terminator.
9 19 TRM2
(b) Short–circuit the TRM1 signals
10 TRM1 20 TRM3
as shown. Repeat the shorting
procedure for signals TRM2
and TRM3.

Cable connection

JD2

Shorting jumper
TRM1 (4)
TRM1 (10)
Shorting jumper
TRM2 (12)
TRM2 (19)
Shorting jumper
TRM3 (14)
TRM3 (20)

80
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.8 For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :
Connecting with I/O one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.
The terminal block is a removable type.
Modules
Terminal block type Connector type

Input/Output
display LED
A0 . . .7
B0 . . .7 Terminal
block cover

Connector
HONDA
TSUSHIN
KOGYO
CO., LTD.
MR–50RMA

M3.5 screw terminal (20 terminal)

Mounting the terminal


block
1 Insert the protruding portion at the bottom of the terminal block in the
groove of the module side.
2 Push the terminal block using the engaging point of the protruding
portion and the groove as an axis and mount it in the module firmly.
3 Open the cover of the terminal block and check to make sure the latch
at the top of the terminal block is firmly set.

Dismounting the
terminal block

1 Open the cover of the terminal block.


2 Push up the latch at the top of the terminal block.
3 Drag out the tab at the top of the terminal block and pull it out.
The terminal block will be removed from the module.

81
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Cautionary points when  Wiring material : AWG22 – 18 (0.3 – 0.75mm2)


wiring terminal block A wire as thin as possible is recommended.
type  Crimp style terminal : M3.5
Crimp style terminal with no insulation sleeve and a short distance
“A”, as illustrated in the drawing below, is recommended.
A

A : Approx. 4.5mm

DAIDO SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG. CO., LTD 1.25–S3.5

NICHIFU EUROPE B.V 1.25–3.5S, etc.


NICHIFU AMERICA, INC.

 Mark tube : As short a mark tube as possible ; cover climped part


with the mark tube.

6.3.9
Digital Input/Output
Module
Digital input modules
Mod- Re- External
Input Rated Rated Polar- LED
ule sponse Points connec-
type voltage current ity display
name time tion
AID Maximum not
Non–in- 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector
32A 20ms provided
sulation
DC input AID Maximum not
24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector
32B 2ms provided
AID Maximum Terminal
24VDC 7.5mA NEG 16 provided
16C 20ms block
AID Maximum Terminal
Insulation 24VDC 7.5mA POS 16 provided
16D 20ms block
type
ty e DC
input AID Maximum not
24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector
32E 20ms provided
AID Maximum not
24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector
32F 2ms provided
10.5mA
AIA 100– ON Max 35ms Terminal
AC input (120V 16 provided
16G 120VAC OFF Max 45ms block
AC)

Notes
1. Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current source type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a low level
Positive : 24 V common (current sink type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a high level
2. For the details of the specifications for each module, refer
to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection⋅Maintenance
Manual (B–61813E).

82
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Digital output modules


ModĆ Points External
Output Rated Rated PolarĆ LED
ule Points /comĆ connecĆ Fuse
type voltage current ity display
name mon tion

AOD 12–24 Terminal pro-


2A NEG 8 8 provided
08C VDC block vided
AOD Terminal pro-
2A POS 8 8 provided
08D block vided
not
AOD Terminal
0.5A NEG 16 8 provided pro-
Insula- 16C block
vided
tion
type not
AOD Terminal
DC 0.5A POS 16 8 provided pro-
16D block
output vided
not
AOD Connec- not
0.3A NEG 32 8 pro-
32C tor provided
vided
not
AOD Connec- not
0.3A POS 32 8 pro-
32D tor provided
vided
AOD 100– Terminal pro-
2A – 5 1 provided
05E 240V block vided
AOD AC Terminal pro-
AC 1A – 8 4 provided
08E block vided
out ut
output
100–
AOD Terminal pro-
120V 0.5A – 12 6 provided
12F block vided
AC
Maxi- not
AOR Terminal
mum 4A – 8 1 provided pro-
08G block
Relay 250VA vided
output C/ not
AOR 30VDC Terminal
2A – 16 4 provided pro-
16G block
vided

Notes
1. Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current sink type)
– Output is at low level when ON.
Positive : 24 V common (current source type)
– Output is at high level when ON.
2. For the details of the specifications for each module, refer
to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection⋅Maintenance
Manual (B–61813E).

83
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.3.10
Correspondence Bit
between I/O Signals Address in the
module
and Addresses in a #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Module Module of 8
0 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 points

Module of 16
points
1 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0

2 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
Module of
32 points

3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Addresses in a module are defined relatively, with the beginning address


as 0. Real addresses viewed by the sequence program of the PMC are set
by the programmer.
For input modules, an input signal becomes “1” when the contact point
connected with the input is turned ON. For output modules, an output
contact point (or transistor) is turned ON when the output signal is “1”.

84
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.11 Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O Unit –MODEL A using
Number of Points for the following.
I/O Unit–MODEL A
 Output points
Sum of the actual output Occupied output points
points in a group
0 to 32 → 32 points
40 to 64 → 64 points
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
(Note) Count AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.
 Input points
Sum of the actual input Occupied input points
points in a group
0 to 32 → 32 points
40 to 64 → 64 points
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
As a result of the calculation above, when the number of input points is
smaller than that of the output points in a single group, the number of
input points is assumed to be equal to that of the output points.
Example 1:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 0
AOD32C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
AOA12F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
AID32A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AIA16G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
[Input points]
32×5+16×3 = 208 → 256 points
[Output points]
32×3+16×2 = 128 → 128 points
Example 2:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 2.
AOD16C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
AOA05F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
AID16A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
AIA16G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
[Input points]
16×4+16×3 = 112 → 128 points
[Output points]
16×7+8×9 = 184 → 256 points
In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of the
output points, the number of input points is assumedl to be equal to
that of the output points, in other words, 256 points.

85
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.4 The machine operator’s panel interface unit (A16B-2201-0110) is


connected to the control unit through the I/O link and is used for
CONNECTION OF interfacing with the machine operator’s panel.
MACHINE It features interfaces with matrix key switches, LEDs and manual pulse
OPERATOR’S PANEL generators.
INTERFACE UNIT
Machine operator’s
panel I/F unit FANUC I/O Link
Series 16
control unit

Machine operator’s panel


(supplied by a machine tool
builder)

6.4.1
Function Overview

Number of DI/DO points


Operator’s panel control PCB DI/DO = DI/DO =
allocation to the I/O Link
128/128 256/256
DI/DO

DI or DO DI DO DI DO

Number of matrix key switch inputs 64 96


Number of matrix LED data outputs 64 64
Number of general-purpose switch inputs 32 32
Number of general-purpose LED data 32 32
outputs
Number of total DI/DO points 96 96 128 96

 Matrix key switch inputs (matrix DI)


Ninety-six DI points are provided by a matrix of twelve common
signals times eight data signals. Note that I/O link allocation may limit
the number of usable key switch inputs.
 Matrix LED data outputs (matrix DO)
Sixty-four DO points are provided by a matrix of eight common
signals times eight data signals.
 General-purpose switch inputs (general-purpose DI)
Each general-purpose DI point has an individual interface.
 General-purpose LED data outputs (general-purpose DO)
Each general-purpose DO point has an individual interface.

86
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Analog signal inputs  Two inputs (input voltage: 0 to +10 V)


 Input voltages are converted from analog to digital. The resulting five
bits of data are sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.
 The analog signal input function can be used regardless of whether I/O
link allocation is 128/128 or 256/256.
Terminal for signal  Emergency stop and OT release signals are forwarded without change
forwarding to the power magnetics cabinet.
 Power ON/OFF control signals are forwarded without change to an
input unit.
 Analog signal inputs described in item “Analog signal inputs” can be
sent out without being changed.

First manual pulse This function may not be applicable depending on the type of CNC
generator connected. Be sure to check before using.

87
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.4.2
System Configuration

CNC Machine operator’s panel Machine operator’s


interface unit panel

FANUC JD1B CM26 Matrix DI/DO


I/O Link (I/O Link)
*ESP, OTR, and
general-purpose
JD1A CM15
DI/DO
Other machine
interface CM16 General-purpose
DI/DO
CM17 General-purpose
Power supply unit CPD1 DI/DO
(24V)
Note CNB1 LM/SM
Power ON/OFF
(*)
CA40

(*) Power magnetics


+ cabinet

general- *ESP , OTR


CNA1
purpose
DI/DO Input unit power
ON/OFF

CRT/MDI
Spindle amp LM/
SM
*ESP : Emergency stop signal
OTR : OT release signal
ON/OFF : Power ON/OFF control signal
LM/SM : Load meter or speed meter signal
* : Manual pulse generator

Note
Power requirements
When 60% of the DI/DO points are on, this interface unit
requires “1.0 A”
(not including the current required by the CRT and MDI).

88
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.4.3
Signal Assignment

Connector pin signal


assignment
CM15 (General DI/DO) CM16 (General DI/DO) CM17 (General DI/DO)
A B A B A B
01 +5E DI06 01 DI20 DI22 01 0V 0V
02 0V DO06 02 DI24 +5E 02 DO20 DO21
03 +5E DI07 03 DI23 DI21 03 DO22 DO23
04 0V DO07 04 DI25 DI26 04 DO24 DO25
05 +5E DI16 05 DI27 +5E 05 DO26 DO27

ÇÇÇ
06 0V DO16 06 DO00 0V 06 0V 0V

ÇÇÇ
07 +5E DI17 07 DI05 +5E 07 DO30 DO31
08 0V DO17 08 DO01 0V 08 DO32 DO33
09 *ESP ECM1 09
ÇÇÇ
DI15 +5E
ÇÇÇÇ
09
ÇÇÇ DO34 DO35

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
10 OTR ECM2 10 DO02 0V 10 DO36 DO37

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
11 DI00 D102 11 DO03 DO04 11 0V 0V
12 DI04 +5E 12 DO05 0V 12 +5E +5E
13
ÇÇÇ
DI03 DI01 13 0V 0V
ÇÇÇÇ
13
ÇÇÇ DI30 DI31

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
14 DI05 DI10 14 DO10 DO11 14 DI32 DI33

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
15 DI12 DI14 15 DO12 DO13 15 DI34 DI35
16 +5E DI13 16 DO14 DO15 16 DI36 DI37
17
ÇÇÇ
DI11 DI15 17 +5E +5E

CA40 (Connector on the manual pulse generator)


17 +5E +5E

10 DI33 20 +5E
9 DI32 19 +5E
8 DI31 18
7 DI30 17 0V
6 16 DO37
5 15 0V
4 HB1 14 DI37
3 RA1 13 DI36
2 +5V 12 DI35
1 +5V 11 DI34

CNA1 (Connector on the machine side)

ÇÇÇ
10 ECM2 20
9 0 19 OTR
8 ECM1 18
7 DO36 17 *ESP
6 SM 16
5 SM 15 COM
4 0M 14
3 0M 13 EOF
2 LM 12
1 LM 11 EON

ÇÇÇÇ
CNB1 (Connector on the operator’s panel side) CPD1 (Power supply)
01
02
03
LM
SM
0M
05
06
07
EON
EOF
COM
ÇÇÇÇ
09

ÇÇÇÇ
10
11
HA1
HA2
+5V
3

6
2
0V
5
1
+24V
4
04 0M 08 0V 12 0V 0V +24V

Pins shaded by are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the same
name are connected directly to one another.

ÇÇÇ
Note 1 LM and SM also function as input terminals to the A/D converter.
Note 2 OM is connected to 0 V on the PCB.

usable. ÇÇÇ
Input/output pins shaded by are in pairs. Only one in each pair is

89
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

JD1A (FANUC I/O Link : NEXT SLAVE)


10 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 18 +5V
7 17
6 16 0V
5 15 0V
4 *TXB 14 0V
3 TXB 13 0V
2 *RXB 12 0V
1 RXB 11 0V

JD1B (FANUC I/O Link : BEFORE SLAVE)


10 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 18 +5V
7 17
6 16 0V
5 15 0V
4 *TXA 14 0V
3 TXA 13 0V
2 *RXA 12 0V
1 RXA 11 0V

CM26 (Matrix DI/DO)


A B
01 0V *MND1
02 *KYD0 *KYD1
03 *KYD2 *KYD3
04 *KYD4 *KYD5
05 *KYD6 *KYD7
06 *KYC0 *KYC1
07 *KYC2 *KYC3
08 *KYC4 *KYC5
09 *KYC6 *KYC7
10 *KYC8 *KYC9
11 *KYCA *KYCB
12 *BZMD 0V
13 *LD0 *LD8
14 *LD1 *LD9
15 *LD2 *LD10
16 *LD3 *LD11
17 *LD4 *LD12
18 *LD5 *LD13
19 *LD6 *LD14
20 *LD7 *LD15
21 LC1L LC1H
22 LC2L LC2H
23 LC3L LC3H
24 LC4L LC4H
25 0V 0V

DInx General-purpose DI LM Load meter voltage


DOnx General-purpose DO SM Speed meter voltage
*ESP Emergency stop 0M LM/SM reference voltage (0V)
ECM1 *ESP common signal *KYDx Matrix DI data signal
OTR OT release *KYCx Matrix DI common signal
ECM2 OTR common signal *LDx Matrix DO data signal
EON/OF Power ON/OFF control signal LCnL/H Matrix DO common signal
COM EON/EOF common signal *MNDI Three DI points acceptable
HAI Input from manual pulse gener- *BZMD Buzzer off
ator
HBI Input from manual pulse gener-
ator

Note See Subsection 6.4.4 for details of connection and signal meanings.

90
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.4.4
Interface

General–purpose DI

+5E

DI00–DI37
RV

0V

Input signal specifications


Contact rating 5VDC, 3.2mA or higher
Leakage current between open contacts 0.2mA or lower (5 VDC)
Voltage drop across closed contacts 0.75V or lower

General–purpose DO

+24V
Photocoupler
DO00–DO37 +
FET

0V

Output signal specifications


Maximum load current 0.03A
Maximum open-circuit leakage 0.1mA
current
Maximum closed-circuit voltage 0.1V
drop

Note
When using an LED at the DO point, connect an external
resistor that meets the requirements of the LED.

91
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Matrix DI
 Key switch addresses See Section 6.4.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.

CM26–A06 KY07 KY06 KY05 KY04 KY03 KY02 KY01 KY00 BZ0
*KYC0
CM26–B06 KY17 KY16 KY15 KY14 KY13 KY12 KY11 KY10 BZ1
*KYC1
CM26–A07 KY27 KY26 KY25 KY24 KY23 KY22 KY21 KY20 BZ2
*KYC2
CM26–B07 KY37 KY36 KY35 KY34 KY33 KY32 KY31 KY30 BZ3
*KYC3
CM26–A08 KY47 KY46 KY45 KY44 KY43 KY42 KY41 KY40 BZ4
*KYC4
CM26–B08 KY57 KY56 KY55 KY54 KY53 KY52 KY51 KY50 BZ5
*KYC5
CM26–A09 KY67 KY66 KY65 KY64 KY63 KY62 KY61 KY60 BZ6
*KYC6
CM26–B09 KY77 KY76 KY75 KY74 KY73 KY72 KY71 KY70 BZ7
*KYC7
CM26–A10 KY87 KY86 KY85 KY84 KY83 KY82 KY81 KY80 BZ8
*KYC8
CM26–B10 KY97 KY96 KY95 KY94 KY93 KY92 KY91 KY90 BZ9
*KYC9
CM26–A11 KYA7 KYA6 KYA5 KYA4 KYA3 KYA2 KYA1 KYA0 BZA
*KYCA
CM26–B11 KYB7 KYB6 KYB5 KYB4 KYB3 KYB2 KYB1 KYB0 BZB
*KYCB
CM26–B05
*KYD7
CM26–A05
*KYD6
CM26–B04
*KYD5
CM26–A04
*KYD4
CM26–B03
*KYD3
CM26–A03
*KYD2
CM26–B02
*KYD1
CM26–A02
*KYD0

CM26–A12
*BZMD

CM26–B01
*MNDI
When *MNDI = 0, it enables three or more simultaneous inputs.
CM26–A01 When *MNDI = 1, it inhibits three or more simultaneous inputs.
0V

92
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

D Mode selection - Preventing malfunctions that may be caused by detouring current


When there are three or more matrix DI points, detouring current
can cause a nonexistent DI input to be falsely detected as existing.
As shown below, if KY01, KY03, and KY21 are closed
simultaneously, current detours through the path indicated with
arrows, thus causing a false input of *KY23 to be detected because
of a current path formed by a combination of common signal
*KYC2 and data signal *KYD3.
KY03 KY01
*KYC0

*KYC1
KY23 KY21
*KYC2

*KYC3

*KYD3
*KYD2
*KYD1
*KYD0

Two modes are available to prevent this malfunction. One should


be selected according to the user applications.
D Ignoring all occurrences of three or more simultaneous inputs
Action : Make the *MNDI signal open (see item “D Key
switch addresses”)

Note
If there are two inputs and a third is added, all three
are ignored. When one of the three inputs is
removed, two are accepted.

D Attaching detour prevention diodes to enable three


simultaneous inputs
Action : Connect the *MNDI signal (see item “D Key switch
addresses”) to 0V.

Note
A diode must be connected in series with a switch,
as shown below.

Detour prevention diode

*KYCn

*KYDn

93
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

- This PCB can raise a confirmation sound when a key is pressed.


The condition to raise an audible alarm is set in 8-bit units, or in
*KYCn units. If *BZMD and common *KYCn are disconnected,
a KYnx input causes a sound to generate. If they are connected, a
KYnx input does not generate the sound.
To generate a confirmation sound for key input, the DO (PMC
address DO + 00.7) “MD07” must have been turned to “1” (see
Section 6.4.5).

Notes
1. A diode is necessary to connect *BZMD and *KYCn, as
shown below.
2. This setting cannot be changed when power is supplied.
3. The sound is generated when the circuit closes between
common signal *KYCn and data signal *KYDx. It does not
sound when the circuit is disconnected. If key switches are
used, the sound is heard at the moment a key is pressed.
It does not sound when a key is released or when a key is
held pressed.

*KYCn

*BZMD

(Example)
If *BZMD is connected to *KYC0 and *KYC2, but disconnected
from *KYC1 and *KYC3, as shown below, closing a switch at key
addresses KY10 to KY17 and KY30 to KY37 causes a
confirmation sound for key input to be heard, but closing a switch
at key addresses KY00 to KY07 and KY20 to KY27 does not.
See item “D Key switch addresses”.

*KYC0

*KYC1

*KYC2

*KYC3

*BZMD

94
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

 Signal specification
Contact rating 6VDC, 2mA or higher
Leakage current between open contacts 0.2mA or lower (6VDC)
Voltage drop across closed contacts 0.9V or lower (1 mA) Note )

Note
This voltage must be maintained even when detour
prevention diodes are used.

95
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Matrix DO
 LED addresses See item 6.4.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.

LC4L CM26-A24
LC3L CM26-A23
LC2L CM26-A22
LC1L CM26-A21

CM26-A13 L1L0
*LD0
CM26-A14 L1L1
*LD1
CM26-A15 L1L2
*LD2
CM26-A16 L1L3
*LD3
CM26-A17 L1L4
*LD4
CM26-A18 L1L5
*LD5
CM26-A19 L1L6
*LD6
CM26-A20 L1L7
*LD7

L2L0
L2L1
L2L2
L2L3
L2L4
L2L5
L2L6
L2L7

L3L0
L3L1
L3L2
L3L3
L3L4
L3L5
L3L6
L3L7

L4L0
L4L1
L4L2
L4L3
L4L4
L4L5
L4L6
L4L7

Note
The timing for the common signals are shown below. Their
duty cycle is 2 ms for LEDs being on and 6 ms for LEDs
being off.
LC4L (H)
LC3L (H)
LC2L (H)
LC1L (H)

8ms

96
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

CM26-B24
LC4H
CM26-B23
LC3H
CM26-B22
LC2H
CM26-B21
LC1H

CM26-B13 L1H0
*LD8
CM26-B14 L1H1
*LD9
CM26-B15 L1H2
*LD10
CM26-B16 L1H3
*LD11
CM26-B17 L1H4
*LD12
CM26-B18 L1H5
*LD13
CM26-B19 L1H6
*LD14
CM26-B20 L1H7
*LD15

L2H0
L2H1
L2H2
L2H3
L2H4
L2H5
L2H6
L2H7

L3H0
L3H1
L3H2
L3H3
L3H4
L3H5
L3H6
L3H7

L4H0
L4H1
L4H2
L4H3
L4H4
L4H5
L4H6
L4H7

 Internal circuit The circuit contains a 100-ohm resistor, as shown below.


Connecting an LED does not require an external resistor.

+5E
CM26 LCnL (H)

CM26 *LDx

100 Ω LnL(H)x

97
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

 Signal specifications The LEDs must have the following rating


Forward voltage 2.4V max (If=5mA)(Typical value)
Forward current 30mA max
Reverse voltage 3V max

Interface for manual


pulse generator
 Connection of connector One interface is provided on connector CNB1.
CNB1
Manual pulse
HA1 9 HA1 generator
When only the
manual pulse HB1 10 HB1
generator is directly
connected +5V 11 +5V

0V 12
0V
CNB1
Control PCB

 Connection of connector Pendant-type manual pulse generator with axis selection and multiplier
CA40 setting functions can be connected to connector CA40.

Pendant-type manual
pulse generator
When a
HA1 3 HA1
pendant-type
manual pulse
HB1 4 HB1
generator Axis Multiplier
with including selection setting
+5V 1, 2 +5V
axis selection
and multiplier
0V 17,18 0V
setting
functions is 0V 15 0V
connected
7 to DI
DI30 to DI37 14

DO37 16 DO

CA40
Control PCB

Notes
1. When DI30 to DI37 of connector CA40 are allocated as the
DIs used for the axis selection and multiplier setting, DI30
to DI37 of connector CM17 cannot be used.
2. One DO is available for the manual pulse generator side at
the user’s discretion. When this is used, DO37 of CM17
cannot be used, as in the case for DIs above.
3. This function may not be applicable depending on the type
of CNC connected. Be sure to check before using.

98
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Analog signal inputs Analog inputs received from the outside are forwarded without change to
output terminals.

 Connection diagram Analog inputs from the spindle amp being output for load meter and speed
(example) meter indications.

LM
Spindle LM 1, 2 1
amp Load
0M 3 3 0M meter

(Operator’s
0M 4 4 0M panel)

Speed
SM 5, 6 2 meter
SM
CNA1 CNB1

Machine operator’s
panel interface unit

 Sent to the CNC Analog inputs received on the Machine operator’s panel interface unit are
converted to five-bit digital values, which are sent to the CNC though the
I/O link.
See Section 6.4.5 for PMC addresses.
LM conversion data : “LM03 to LM07”
SM conversion data : “SM03 to SM07”

 Analog signal
specifications Acceptable input voltage 0V to +15V
Voltage that can be converted to digital 0V to +10V Note)

Note
Any voltage higher than +10V is converted to the same
digital value as +10V is.

 A/D conversion
specifications Conversion error 5% (max)
Resolution 5 bit (min)

99
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

 Emergency stop A signal generated by the emergency stop switch on the machine
operator’s panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet. (This signal
cannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
Emergency stop
signal
A09 17 *ESP
*ESP *ESP

B09 8 24V
ECM1 ECM1

CM15 CNA1

Machine operator’s Power magnetics


panel interface unit cabinet

 OT release A signal generated by the OT release switch on the machine operator’s


panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet.
(This signal cannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
OT release switch

A10 19 OTR
OTR OTR

B10 10
ECM2 ECM
ECM2
CM15 CNA1

Machine operator’s Power magnetics


panel interface unit cabinet

 Power ON/OFF control Signals generated by the power ON/OFF control switches on the machine
signal operator’s panel can be sent to an input unit. (These signals cannot be sent
to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)

5 11 EON
ON switch EON

6 13 ECF
ECF
OFF switch
COM 7 15 COM

CM15 CNA1

Machine operator’s
panel interface unit Input unit

Note
The LM, OM, SM, D036, ECM, EON, EOF, COM, ESP, and
OTR signals are all assigned to the pins of one connector
(CNA1).
They can be connected to the machine using only one cable.

100
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.4.5
PMC addresses

Scope in which PMC


addresses can be used
BIT NUMBER I/O link allocation
PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 128/128 256/256
ADDRESS
DI+00 FUSE
DI+01 KY07 KY06 KY05 KY04 KY03 KY02 KY01 KY00
DI+02 KY17 KY16 KY15 KY14 KY13 KY12 KY11 KY10
DI+03 KY27 KY26 KY25 KY24 KY23 KY22 KY21 KY20
DI+04 KY37 KY36 KY35 KY34 KY33 KY32 KY31 KY30
DI+05 KY47 KY46 KY45 KY44 KY43 KY42 KY41 KY40
DI+06 KY57 KY56 KY55 KY54 KY53 KY52 KY51 KY50
DI+07 KY67 KY66 KY65 KY64 KY63 KY62 KY61 KY60
DI+08 KY77 KY76 KY75 KY74 KY73 KY72 KY71 KY70
DI+09 DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
DI+10 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
DI+11 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
DI+12 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
DI+13 LM07 LM06 LM05 LM04 LM03
DI+14 SM07 SM06 SM05 SM04 SM03
DI+15 MP17 MP16 MP15 MP14 MP13 MP12 MP11 MP10
DI+16 Reserved for use by FANUC
DI+17
DI+18 KY87 KY86 KY85 KY84 KY83 KY82 KY81 KY80
DI+19 KY97 KY96 KY95 KY94 KY93 KY92 KY91 KY90
DI+20 KYA7 KYA6 KYA5 KYA4 KYA3 KYA2 KYA1 KYA0
DI+21 KYB7 KYB6 KYB5 KYB4 KYB3 KYB2 KYB1 KYB0

DO+00 MD07 MD06 FUSE


DO+01 L1L7 L1L6 L1L5 L1L4 L1L3 L1L2 L1L1 L1L0
DO+02 L2L7 L2L6 L2L5 L2L4 L2L3 L2L2 L2L1 L2L0
DO+03 L3L7 L3L6 L3L5 L3L4 L3L3 L3L2 L3L1 L3L0
DO+04 L4L7 L4L6 L4L5 L4L4 L4L3 L4L2 L4L1 L4L0
DO+05 L1H7 L1H6 L1H5 L1H4 L1H3 L1H2 L1H1 L1H0
DO+06 L2H7 L2H6 L2H5 L2H4 L2H3 L2H2 L2H1 L2H0
DO+07 L3H7 L3H6 L3H5 L3H4 L3H3 L3H2 L3H1 L3H0
DO+08 L4H7 L4H6 L4H5 L4H4 L4H3 L4H2 L4H1 L4H0
DO+09 DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
DO+10 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
DO+11 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
DO+12 DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30

FUSE : When 1, it indicates the +5E fuse has blown.


Shorting of the general-purpose DI input is considered as a possible cause. Turn off the power at once,
check the general-purpose DI input and its vicinity, replace the fuse and turn the power on.
DInx : General-purpose DI
LM0x : Load meter indication
SM0x : Speed meter indication
KYnx : Ky signal (matrix)
LnL (H) x : LED signal (matrix)
DOnx : General-purpose DO
MD07 : Buzzer mode selection (It is possible to sound the buzzer at the matrix DI input by turning this to “1”.)
MD06 : Buzzer ON/OFF setting (The buzzer sounds as this is turned to “1” and stops as it is turned to “0”. This
operation is performed irrespective of MD07.)
MP1X : First manual pulse generator

101
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.4.6  Use flat cables for connectors CM15, CM16, CM17, and CM26. When
Major Connection splitting and connecting flat cables to the machine operator’s panel or
other equipment, be careful not to break or short the conductors.
Precautions
 All signals with the same name described in Section 6.4.3 are
connected to one another.
 One of the holes for mounting the PCB is also used for grounding.
Before mounting the PCB, check the location of that hole with the
diagram in Section 6.4.10.

6.4.7 L1 (green) :
State of the LEDs on Monitors +5E. When on, it indicates that the fuse is intact (+5E: 5V for
connector output).
the Machine Operator’s When off, it indicates that the fuse has blown.
Panel Interface Unit L2 (green) :
Monitors key scanning. When blinking, it indicates that the keys are
being scanned normally. When on or off, it indicates key scanning is at
halt.
L3 (red) :
When on, it indicates that an alarm condition has occurred. When off, it
indicates that there is no alarm condition.

6.4.8
Connector Connector Major use Specification
(on the Cable Side) CM15, General-purpose HIF3BA-34D-2.54R :
Specifications CM16, DI/DO Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CM17 CO., LTD.
CNA1 Relay terminal PCR-E20FS :
(to the machine) Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KO-
GYO CO., LTD.
CNB1 Relay terminal MVSTBR2.5/12-ST-5.08 :
(to the machine Manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT
operator’s panel) GmbH & Co.
JD1A, FANUC I/O Link PCR-E20FS :
JD1B Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KO-
GYO CO., LTD.
CPD1 Power supply Dynamic D3100 (three pins) :
Manufactured by AMP JAPAN, LTD.
1-178288-3 : Connector
1-175218-5 : Contact
CM26 Matrix DI/DO HIF3BB-50D-2.54R :
Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CO., LTD.
CA40 Manual pulse MR-20LFH (solder type) :
generator Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KO-
GYO CO., LTD.

102
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Notes
1. Several types of connectors are available for use at the
other end of the cable leading to connector CNB1. Refer to
brochures of PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co..
The connector used on the machine operator’s panel
interface unit side is MSTBVA2.5/12-G-5.08.
2. Crimped type cable connector is available for CA40. For
purchase from FANUC, please specify as below.
A02B-0029-K890 : Solder type
A02B-0029-K892 : Crimped type

103
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.4.9
Machine Operator’s
Panel Interface Unit
Dimension Diagram
(Including Connector
Locations)

89 22

CM26 A1

CPD1
B25

15
11
A1

17 10

60
CNB1
CM17
150

CNA1

9
B17

41
75

16

JD1B
1 CA40 CM16 CM15 A1

JD1A
A1

22
20 B17 B17

40
124 89 26
310

Unit : mm
Tolerance : "5 (mm)

CPD1

CND1

CNA1

CA40 JD1A
JD2B

Approx. 100mm 10mm

1.6mm

104
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.4.10
Machine Operator’s
Panel Interface Unit
Mounting Dimension
Diagram

Mounting hole position


20

CM26

18
CM17
150
110

114
Hole for connecting to a ground
4.5

CM16 CM15
20

18
296

310

Fasten the PCB with four M4 screws. Unit : mm

105
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Sheet fixing area It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
(mounting face side) diagram below.

15 12
10

10
CM26
10

8
18
25

7
CM17

130
130

7 5

CM16 CM15
20

14
10

8
10

10
12 14

Note
Applied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.

Sheet fixing area It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
(Soldering face side) diagram below.

14 12

CM26
13

10
7

8
14
21
CM17

126
124

3
CM16 CM15
17
7

12

8
13

10

13 14

Note
Applied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.

106
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.4.11
Fuse Mounting
Position

CM26

FU1

CPD1
FU3

FU2
CM17

JD1A

JD1B
CM16 CM15

FU1 : +24V fuse (general-purpose DO, this supplies printed board power protection)
FU2 : +5V fuse (IC power, manual pulse generator protection)
FU3 : +5E fuse (general-purpose DI protection)

Note
FU2 is not mounted on Revision 05A or later.

107
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.5 The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B-2200-0660, 0661) is


connected to the control unit through the FANUC I/O Link and is used for
CONNECTION OF interfacing with the machine operator’s panel.
OPERATOR’S PANEL The electric interface and pin layout of the connectors CM1 to CM4 are
CONNECTION UNIT fully compatible with those for Series 15. There are two units available
depending on the number of I/O points.
Specification Input Output
A16B-2200-0660 96 points 64 points
A16B-2200-0661 64 points 32 points

Operator’s panel connection unit


A16B-2200-0660,0661
Control unit
or I/O unit

JD1A JD1B JDIA To next device

If there is no equipment
beyond this connection
unit, JD1A can remain
open.

24V DC power CP61 CM1 Machine


operator’s
CM2 panel
BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.
3P CONNECTOR
(Brown) CM3
Housing : SMS3PNS-5
Contact : RC16M-SCT3 CM4

1 +24V
2 GND
3

Power supply input specification


Voltage : 24 VDC "10%
Capacity : 500 + 7.3 n mA
n : number of inputs that turn on simultaneously

108
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.5.1 The input signal of the operator’s panel connection unit is 0V common
Input Signal non-insulation type interface as shown below.
Regulations for
Operator’s Panel
Machine Operator’s panel connection unit
Connection Unit tool
Direct +24V
current Receiver
input output
signal signal
Filter and level
converter circuit

Receiver circuit

Fig. 6.5.1(a) Receiver circuit

Direct current (Signal) (Signal)


input signal Logi 0
OFF (High) (more
ON (Low) than 18V)
Logi 1
(less
Chattering of 5ms than 6V)
or less is ignored

Receiver output
signal

5 to 22ms 5 to 22ms

Fig. 6.5.1(b) Width of input signals and delay time

In the above figure, it is logic 0 when the contact is open and logic 1 when
closed.
Connect the common line of the input signal of the operator’s panel
connection unit as shown below.

Machine tool Connector


CM1
DI00 to DI57

COM1
Connector Operator’s panel
CM2 connection unit
DI60 to DIB7

COM2

Fig. 6.5.1(c) Connection of common lines

109
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Caution
When a 0V common (source) interface is used, a ground
fault in an input signal has the same effect as closing the
contacts. From the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC
does not recommend the use of such an interface for input
signals. In particular, input signals X008.0 to X008.7 must
be connected in a sink layout, because these signals
include the emergency stop signal.

6.5.2 Output signals DO00 to DO77 of the operator’s panel connection unit
Output Signal drive indicators and LEDs on the machine operator’s panel and use NPN
transistor for drivers.
Regulations for Prepare 24VDC for power supply of indicators and LEDs and connect 0V
Operator’s Panel to COM3 and COM4. For LEDs, however, 5VDC 300mA output from
Connection Unit the terminal +5N of the connector CM3 can be used. There is no +5N in
the connector CM4; use +5N in connector CM3 as shown below:
Output regulation Load voltage : 24V +20% or less
Load current : 40mA

Connector CM3 Indicator


Transistor output

R
DO00 to 57
LED
R

+5N
+5VDC COM3
300mA
max
Connector CM4 Indicator
Transistor output

R
DO60 to 77
LED
R +
24V
stabilized
power

COM4

Operator’s panel
connectIon unit

Caution
When a sink output interface is used, a ground fault in an
output signal causes the output signal to remain on. From
the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not
recommend the use of such an interface for output signals.

110
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.5.3
Connector Layout for
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit

CM1

1 DI00 33
2 DI03 34 DI02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI01
3 DI06 35 DI05
20 DI04 Xn DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
4 DI11 36 DI10
21 DI07
5 DI14 37 DI13 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
22 DI12 Xn+1
6 DI17 38 DI16
23 DI15
7 DI22 39 DI21 Xn+2 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
24 DI20
8 DI25 40 DI24
25 DI23 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
9 DI27 41 DI26 Xn+3
26 DI30
10 DI32 42 DI31
27 DI33 Xn+4 DI47 DI46 DI45 DI44 DI43 DI42 DI41 DI40
11 DI35 43 DI34
28 DI36
12 DI40 44 DI37 DI57 DI56 DI55 DI54 DI53 DI52 DI51 DI50
29 DI41 Xn+5
13 DI43 45 DI42
30 DI44
14 DI46 46 DI45
31 DI47
15 DI51 47 DI50
32 DI52
16 DI54 48 DI53
17 DI56 9 DI55
18 COM1 50 DI57

CM2

1 DI60 33
2 DI63 34 DI62 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI61
3 DI66 35 DI65
20 DI64 Xn+6 DI67 DI66 DI65 DI64 DI63 DI62 DI61 DI60
4 DI71 36 DI70
21 DI67
5 DI74 37 DI73 DI77 DI76 DI75 DI74 DI73 DI72 DI71 DI70
22 DI72 Xn+7
6 DI77 38 DI76
23 DI75
7 DI82 39 DI81 Xn+8 DI87 DI86 DI85 DI84 DI83 DI82 DI81 DI80
24 DI80
8 DI85 40 DI84
25 DI83 DI97 DI96 DI95 DI94 DI93 DI92 DI91 DI90
9 DI87 41 DI86 Xn+9
26 DI90
10 DI92 42 DI91
27 DI93 Xn+10 DIA7 DIA6 DIA5 DIA4 DIA3 DIA2 DIA1 DIA0
11 DI95 43 DI94
28 DI96
12 DIA0 44 DI97 DIB7 DIB6 DIB5 DIB4 DIB3 DIB2 DIB1 DIB0
29 DIA1 Xn+11
13 DIA3 45 DIA2
30 DIA4
14 DIA6 46 DIA5
31 DIA7
15 DIB1 47 DIB0
32 DIB2
16 DIB4 48 DIB3
17 DIB6 9 DIB5
18 COM2 50 DIB7

Note
n in addresses can be 0 to 127.
64 points (DI00 to DI77) can be used for the A16B–2200–0661.

111
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

CM3

1 DO00 33 +5N
2 DO03 34 DO02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DO01
3 DO06 35 DO05
20 DO04 Yn DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
4 DO11 36 DO10
21 DO07
5 DO14 37 DO13
22 DO12 Yn+1 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
6 DO17 38 DO16
23 DO15
7 DO22 39 DO21 Yn+2 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
24 DO20
8 DO25 40 DO24
25 DO23
9 DO27 41 DO26 Yn+3 DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30
26 DO30
10 DO32 42 DO31
27 DO33 Yn+4 DO47 DO46 DO45 DO44 DO43 DO42 DO41 DO40
11 DO35 43 DO34
28 DO36
12 DO40 44 DO37
29 DO41 Yn+5 DO57 DO56 DO55 DO54 DO53 DO52 DO51 DO50
13 DO43 45 DO42
30 DO44
14 DO46 46 DO45
31 DO47
15 DO51 47 DO50
32 DO52
16 DO54 48 DO53
17 DO56 9 DO55
18 COM3 50 DO57

CM4

1 DO60 14 DO60
8 DO62
2 DO64 15 DO63 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9 DO65
3 DO67 16 DO66
10 DO70 Yn+6 DO67 DO66 DO65 DO64 DO63 DO62 DO61 DO60
4 DO72 17 DO71
11 DO73
5 DO75 18 DO74 Yn+7 DO77 DO76 DO75 DO74 DO73 DO72 DO71 DO70
12 DO76
6 19 DO77
13
7 COM4 20

Note
n in addresses can be 0 to 127.
32 points (DO00 to DO37) can be used for the A16B–2200–0661.

112
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.5.4
External View of
operator’s Panel
Connection Unit







   

Fig. 6.5.4 External view of operator’s panel connection unit

113
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.6 The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2202–0730, 0731), which


connects to the control unit via the FANUC I/O Link, acts as an interface
CONNECTION OF with the machine operator’s panel.
SOURCE OUTPUT Connectors CM51, CM52, CMB3, and CMB4, used to interface with the
TYPE CONNECTION operator’s panel, feature an electrical interface and pin assignment which
are fully compatible with those of the operator’s panel connection unit for
UNIT
the Series 15. The following two units are available with different
numbers of I/O points:
Specifications No. of input points No. of output points
A16B–2202–0730 96 64
A16B–2202–0731 64 32

Operator’s Panel Connection Unit


A16B-2202-0730, 0731

Control unit
or
I/O unit JD1A JD1B JD1A To next device
When no other device is
connected to the connec-
tion unit, leave JD1A open.

24V DC power CM51

CM52 Machine
BURNDY 3P CONNECTOR (Brown) operation’s
Housing: SMS3PNS-5 CMB3 panel
Contact: RC16M-SCT3
CMB4

1 +24V
2 GND
3

Power input regulations


Voltage : 24V DC"10%
Capacity : 500+7. 3 n (mA)
n: Number of input points which are simultaneously turned on

Notes
Use 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or heavier wire as the power cable.

114
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.6.1 Most input signals for the source output type connection unit support a
Input signal sink type (0–V common) non–isolated interface. For some input signals,
however, either sink or source type can be selected. (Note, however, that
Specifications for safety standards require the use of the sink type.)
Source Output Type
The machine’s contacts shall conform to the following specifications:
Connection Unit
Capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or higher
Intercontact leakage current in closed circuit:
1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
Intercontact voltage drop in closed circuit:
2 V or less (including the voltage drop in the cables)

Circuit of sink type input receiver

Machine Operator’s panel connection unit


Receiver
output
Input signal Filter and level signal
conversion cir-
Contact cuit
+24V R

+24V

Circuit of input receiver for which common voltage can be selected

Machine Operator’s panel connection unit Receiver


output
Input signal Filter and level signal
conversion cir-
Contact cuit
R

DICMN

+24V
+24V

0V

Receiver
output
Input signal Filter and level signal
conversion cir-
Contact cuit
R

DICMN

+24V
+24V

0V

Fig. 6.6.1 (a) Receiver circuit

115
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

DC input signal
OFF (High) (Signal) (Signal)
ON (Low) Logical 0
(18 V or
higher)
Logical 1
(6V or
lower)
Chattering of 5
ms or less is ig-
nored.

Receiver output
signal

5 to 22ms 5 to 22ms

Fig. 6.6.1 (b) Signal width and delay of input signal


In the above figure, logical 0 corresponds to open contacts, while logical
1 corresponds to closed contacts.

Caution
When a source interface is used, a ground fault in an input
signal has the same effect as closing the contacts. From the
viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not recommend
the use of such an interface for input signals.

6.6.2 The output signals shall satisfy the following:


Output Signal
Specifications for Maximum load current when driver is on:
200 mA (including momentary values)
Source Output Type Saturation voltage when driver is on:
Connection Unit 1.0 V max.
Withstand voltage: 24 V +20% (including momentary values)
Leakage current when driver is off:
100 mA

Prepare the following external power supply for the output signals:

Supply voltage: +24 V "10%


Supply current (per board):
At least total maximum load current
(including momentary values) + 100 mA
Power–on timing: At the same time as or before turning on
the power to the control unit
Power–off timing: At the same time as or after turning on the
power to the control unit

116
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Note
A power supply which satisfies the above specifications
shall be connected to the DOCOM and 0V power supply
terminals for the output signals. The maximum current that
can be carried by the DOCOM pin is 2.0 A. The total load
current must not exceed this value, therefore.

Output signal driver The output signal driver used with the operator’s panel connection unit
can output up to eight signals.
The driver element monitors the current of each output signal. If an
overcurrent is detected, the output of that signal is turned off. Once a
signal has been turned off, the overcurrent will no longer exist, such that
the driver turns the signal on again. Therefore, in the case of a ground fault
or overload, the output of a signal will be repeatedly turned on and off.
This also occurs when a load which causes a high surge current is
connected.
The driver element contains an overheat detector, which turns off all eight
output signals if the temperature in the device exceeds the set value as a
result of an overcurrent caused by a ground fault or some other failure.
This off state is held. To restore signal output, logically turn the output
off then back on again, for each signal, after the temperature falls below
the set value. Signal output can also be restored by turning the system
power off then back on again.
On the PCB, a red LED beside the driver element lights once the overheat
detection circuit operates.

Note
The overheat detection circuit also causes a system alarm
to be issued to the CNC. (When setting pins CP1 on the
PCB are closed (jumpered), this alarm is not issued to the
CNC.)

Correspondence
between red LEDs and Red LED name DO signals Remarks
DO signals
DAL1 Y q + 0.0 to Y q + 0.7

DAL2 Y q + 1.0 to Y q + 1.7

DAL3 Y q + 2.0 to Y q + 2.7

DAL4 Y q + 3.0 to Y q + 3.7

DAL5 Y q + 4.0 to Y q + 4.7

DAL6 Y q + 5.0 to Y q + 5.7

DAL7 Y q + 6.0 to Y q + 6.7

DAL8 Y q + 7.0 to Y q + 7.7

117
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Note
The above red LED and alarm transfer to the CNC are
supported by PCBs of version 03B and later.

If the output of a signal cannot be turned on even though the CNC


diagnostic indicates that the signal is on, that signal or another signal
being handled by the same element may be overloaded, thus causing the
eight output signals to be turned off. In such a case, turn the system power
off and eliminate the cause of the overload.

 Driver element block


diagram
DOCOM
OHD

CONTROL
IN#0 LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD

CONTROL
IN#1 LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD

CONTROL
IN#7 LOGIC
OUT#7
OCD

OHD: Overheat detection circuit


OCD: Overcurrent detection circuit
The power for operating this driver element is supplied from
DOCOM (24 VDC).

118
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Notes on output signals Observe the following precautions when connecting output signals:

Output pins shall not be connected in parallel, as shown below.

DOCOM

+24V 0V

Relay
DV

DV

0V

When using a dimming resistor, connect a diode to prevent leakage.

DOCOM

+24V 0V

Dimming
resistor
Lamp

DV Leakage prevention diode


0V

119
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.6.3
Connector Pin Layout
for Source Output Type
Connection Unit
CM51 CM52

1 DI00 33 DICMN1 1 DI60 33 0V


2 DI03 34 DI02 2 DI63 34 DI62
19 DI01 19 DI61
3 DI06 35 DI05 3 DI66 35 DI65
20 DI04 20 DI64
4 DI11 36 DI10 4 DI71 36 DI70
21 DI07 21 DI67
5 DI14 37 DI13 5 DI74 37 DI73
22 DI12 22 DI72
6 DI17 38 DI16 6 DI77 38 DI76
23 DI15 23 DI75
7 DI22 39 DI21 7 DI82 39 DI81
24 DI20 24 DI80
8 DI25 40 DI24 8 DI85 40 DI84
25 DI23 25 DI83
9 DI27 41 DI26 9 DI87 41 DI86
26 DI30 26 DI90
10 DI32 42 DI31 10 DI92 42 DI91
27 DI33 27 DI93
11 DI35 43 DI34 11 DI95 43 DI94
28 DI36 28 DI96
12 DI40 44 DI37 12 DIA0 44 DI97
29 DI41 29 DIA1
13 DI43 45 DI42 13 DIA3 45 DIA2
30 DI44 30 DIA4
14 DI46 46 DI45 14 DIA6 46 DIA5
31 DI47 31 DIA7
15 DI51 47 DI50 15 DIB1 47 DIB0
32 DI52 32 DIB2
16 DI54 48 DI53 16 DIB4 48 DIB3
17 DI56 49 DI55 17 DIB6 49 DIB5
18 +24V 50 DI57 18 +24V 50 DIB7

CMB3 CMB4
1 DO00 33 0V 1 DO61 14 DO60
8 DO62
2 DO03 34 DO02 2 DO64 15 DO63
19 DO01 9 DO65
3 DO06 35 DO05 3 DO67 16 DO66
20 DO04 10 DO70
4 DO11 36 DO10 4 DO72 17 DO71
21 DO07 11 DO73
5 DO14 37 DO13 5 DO75 18 DO74
22 DO12 12 DO76
6 DO17 38 DO16 6 DO56 19 DO77
23 DO15 13 DO57
7 DO22 39 DO21 7 0V 20 DOCOM
24 DO20
8 DO25 40 DO24
25 DO23
9 DO27 41 DO26
26 DO30
10 DO32 42 DO31
27 DO33
11 DO35 43 DO34
28 DO36
12 DO40 44 DO37
29 DO41
13 DO43 45 DO42
30 DO44
14 DO46 46 DO45
31 DO47
15 DO51 47 DO50
32 DO52
16 DO54 48 DO53
17 DOCOM 49 DO55
18 DICMN2 50 DOCOM

120
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Note
When the operator’s panel connection unit having 64 DIs
and 32 DOs is selected, connector CMB4 is not mounted on
the PCB.

DICMN1, DICMN2: Pins used to switch the DI common. Usually,


jumper these pins with 0V. (input)
+24V: +24 VDC output pin. This pin shall be used only
for DI signals input to the operator’s panel
connection unit. (output)
DOCOM: Power supply for the DO driver. All DOCOM pins
are connected in the unit. (input)

I/O addresses The following PMC addresses are assigned to the operator’s panel
connection unit, depending on the number of I/O points (DI/DO = 96/64
or 64/32):

[DI address] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Xp DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00


DI: DI: X p+1 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
96 64
points points X p+2 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20

X p+3 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI331 DI30

X p+4 DI47 DI46 DI45 DI44 DI43 DI42 DI41 DI40

X p+5 DI57 DI56 DI55 DI54 DI53 DI52 DI51 DI50

X p+6 DI67 DI66 DI65 DI64 DI63 DI62 DI61 DI60

X p+7 DI77 DI76 DI75 DI74 DI73 DI72 DI71 DI70

X p+8 DI87 DI86 DI85 DI84 DI83 DI82 DI81 DI80

X p+9 DI97 DI96 DI95 DI94 DI93 DI92 DI91 DI90

X p+10 DIA7 DIA6 DIA5 DIA4 DIA3 DIA2 DIA1 DIA0

X p+11 DIB7 DIB6 DIB5 DIB4 DIB3 DIB2 DIB1 DIB0

 Address p is determined by the machine tool builder.


 The common voltage can be selected for the DIs assigned to the
following 20 addresses:
Xp+0.0, Xp+0.1, Xp+0.2, Xp+0.7
Xp+1.0, Xp+1.1, Xp+1.2, Xp+1.7
Xp+4.0 to Xp+4.7
Xp+11.4, Xp+11.5, Xp+11.6, Xp+11.7

121
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

[DO address] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Yq DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00


DO: DO: Y q+1 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
64 32
points points Y q+2 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20

Y q+3 DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30

Y q+4 DO47 DO46 DO45 DO44 DO43 DO42 DO41 DO40

Y q+5 DO57 DO56 DO55 DO54 DO53 DO52 DO51 DO50

Y q+6 DO67 DO66 DO65 DO64 DO63 DO62 DO61 DO60

Y q+7 DO77 DO76 DO75 DO74 DO73 DO72 DO71 DO70

Address q is determined by the machine tool builder.


For details of address assignment, refer to the FANUC PMC RB/RC
Ladder Language Programming Manual (B–61863E).

6.6.4
Dimensions of Source
Output Type
Connection Unit

The following LEDs, fuses, variable resistors, and setting pins are
mounted on the PCB:
[LEDs]
DB1 (green, pilot) : Lights while the power to the PCB is on.
DB2 (red, alarm) : Lights if an error occurs in the PCB or CNC.
DAL1 to DAL8 : See Section 6.6.2

122
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

[Fuses]
FU1 (3.2 A) : Used for external 24–V input.
(Order number : A02B–0120–K104)
FU2 (5.0 A) : Used for +5 V on the PCB.
(Order number : A02B–0200–K103)

[Variable resistors]
VR1 and VR2 : Factory–set by FANUC. The machine tool builder
need not adjust these resistors.

[Setting pin]
CP1 : Used to specify whether the CNC will be notified of
a DO signal error as a system alarm (see Section
6.6.2).

123
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.7
CONNECTION OF FS0
OPERATOR’S PANEL
Outline The FS0 operator’s panel is provided with a lot of key switches, LEDs,
rotary switches, etc. For key switches and LEDs, they are coded, and
connected to the CNC with less signal lines than the actual number of
theses signals. The coding and data transfer are executed by the PMC
management software automatically. Therefore, it is only necessary for
the PMC ladder program to operate with the simple bit image for the key
switches and LEDs.
This chapter describes how the Series 16/18 users connect and assign the
key switches and LEDs signal address and their bit image address to the
PMC address.

I/O Unit or
I/O Card
CNC Controller

Input (Code)
Bit Image Keyboard
Rk ∼ PMC
Xn ∼
Management
Bit Image Output (Code)
Software LED
RI ∼
Ym ∼

Input (Discrete) Protect key,


Emergency
X*∼ stop,
Override,
etc.

FS0
Operator’s
Panel
G* ∼ Input
(X) PMC Ladder
X* ∼ Other Machine
CNC
System Program Interface
Software Output
(User)
F*∼
Y* ∼

Fig. 6.7 Block Diagram

124
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Connection
 Conection with I/O unit

CNC (FS16, 18)

MAIN CPU
I/O UNIT FS0 OPERATOR’S PANEL
DI
JD1A MODULE
JD1B
(I/O Link) M1A
CP32
DO
PSU MODULE
CP6 JD1A M2A

DC24V Other I/O units

DI Module : +24V common, 20ms


(ex.) AID32A1
DO Module : 0V common
(ex.) AOD32A1

 Connection with I/O card

CNC (FS16, 18)


other I/O units
MAIN CPU
other machine I/F
JD1A
(I/O Link) FS0 OPERATOR’S PANEL

I/O CARD
DI M1A
CONNECTOR

DO M2A
CONNECTOR

125
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Signal assignment of
FS0 Operator’s panel
 Signal assignment

M1A M2A

1 0V 33 *0V8 1 0V 33 Ym.7
2 0V 34 *0V4 2 0V 34 Ym.6
19 *ESP 19
3 0V 35 *0V2 3 0V 35 Ym.5
20 20
4 0V 36 *0V1 4 0V 36 Ym.4
21 21
5 Xn.5 37 Xn.6 5 37 Ym.3
22 22
6 38 6 38 Ym.2
23 23
7 39 7 39 Ym.1
24 24
8 40 8 40 Ym.0
25 25
9 41 KEY 9 41
26 26
10 42 Xn+2.7 10 42
27 27
11 43 11 43
28 28
12 44 12 44
29 +24V 29
13 Xn.7 45 13 45
30 +24V 30
14 Xn.4 46 Xn+2.3 14 46
31 +24V 31
15 Xn.3 47 Xn+2.2 15 47
32 +24V 32
16 Xn.2 48 Xn+2.1 16 48
17 Xn.1 49 Xn+2.0 17 49
18 Xn.0 50 18 50

The signals boxed in thick lines in the above figure are used in the FS0
operator’s panel.
+24V is used as the common of such signals and the power source of the
inside of the operator’s panel. Therefore, 0V and +24V of upper figure
must be connected.
For +24V, this operator’s panel requires 0.5A. In the above figure, each
of +24V and 0V uses one pin only. For securer connection, however, it
is recommended to use as many pins as possible in addition to the above.
 Emergency (*ESP) The CNC directly monitors this signal at fixed address.
For the connection, refer to the Function volume (B–62753EN–1) of the
connection manual.
 Override (*OV1∼ *OV8), Since these signals are directly input to the PMC, process them directly
protect key (KEY) by the PMC ladder program.
For the connection, refer to the Function volume (B–62753EN–1) of the
connection manual.
 Key switch signal The key switch signal is decoded into the bit image at the PMC address
(Xn, Xn+2) R by the management software of the PMC. Whether the necessary key
is depressed or not can be known by checking the bit image of the key
switch by the PMC ladder program of the user. (Refer to Table 6.7(a), (b),
(c))
The key switch signal address (Xn ∼ Xn+2 on Table 6.7(a)) and its bit
image address (Rk ∼ Rk+7 on Table 6.7(b), (c)) are optionally assigned
to the proper and unused address. (On FS0, each address is fixed to X20
∼, F292∼.)

126
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

 LED signal (Ym) Generate the LED signal by the bit image at the PMC address R by the
PMC ladder program of the user. The management software of the PMC
encodes that LED bit image to the coded output signal. (Refer to Table
6.7(a), (b), (c))
The LED signal address (Ym on Table 6.7(a)) and its bit image address
(RI ∼ RI+7 on Table 6.7(b), (c)) are optionally assigned to the proper and
unused address.
(On FS0, each address is fixed to Y51, G242∼.)

Table 6.7(a) The key switch and LED signal address


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xn KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
Xn+1
Xn+2 KST KA3 KA2 KA1 KA0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Ym LD7 LD6 LD5 LD4 LD3 LD2 LD1 LD0

Table 6.7(b) The key switch and LED signal bit image address
(For the small type operator’s panel)
KEY/LED 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rk/RI F3 F2 F1 D1 C1 B1 A1
Rk+1/RI+1 F4 D2 C2 B2 A2
Rk+2/RI+2 D4 D3 C4 C3 B4 B3 A4 A3
Rk+3/RI+3 F6 F5 D5 C5 B5 A5
Rk+4/RI+4 F8 D6 C6 B6 A6
Rk+5/RI+5 D8 C8 B8 A8 A7
Rk+6/RI+6 F9 D9 C9 B9 A9
Rk+7/RI+7 F10 D10 C10 B10 A10

Table 6.7(c) The key switch and LED signal bit image address
(For the full key type operator’s panel)
KEY/KED 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rk/RI E1 C1 A1 E6 D6 C6 B6 A6
Rk+1/RI+1 E2 C2 A2 E7 D7 C7 B7 A7
Rk+2/RI+2 E3 C3 A3 E8 D8 C8 B8 A8
Rk+3/RI+3 E5 C4 A4 E9 D9 C9 B9 A9
Rk+4/RI+4 D2 C5 A5 E10 D10 C10 B10 A10
Rk+5/RI+5 D4 D5 B2 E11 D11 C11 B11 A11
Rk+6/RI+6 D1 B1 B4 E12 D12 C12 B12 A12
Rk+7/RI+7 D3 B3 B5 E13 D13 C13 B13 A13

127
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

How to assign Assign the signal address and the bit image address of the key switch and
LED signal as follows.
(It is available from vers. 2.3 of FAPT LADDER on the P–G Mate)

 Parameter screen

KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO.S WHICH YOU WANT TO SET PARA, S.

NO. ITEMS CURRENT PARAMETERS


01 (UNUSED) ;
02 COUNTER DATA TYPE ; BINARY
03 OPERATOR PANEL ; YES
KEY/LED ADDRESS ; X0000/Y0000
KEY/LED BIT IMAGE ADRS. ; R0900/R0910
04 PMC TYPE ; PMC–RB
05 (UNUSED) ;
06 (UNUSED) ;
07 LADDER EXEC. ; 100%
08 (UNUSED) ;
09 IGNORE DIVIDED CODE ; NO
10 (UNUSED) ;
00 NOTHING TO SET ;

NO.=

 Operation 1) Select menu No. “3” on Parameter Screen.


Then, following message appears.

EXAMPLE 0:NO, 1:YES


OP.PANEL=_

2) Select “1” on example menu.


Then , following message appears.

SET KEY/LED ADDRESS (KEY ADRS. , LED ADRS.)


ADDR=_

3) Set PMC ADDRESS (X and Y) for KEY and LED signals.


For example, if you want to set X0 for key switches and Y0 for LEDs,
type “X0, Y0” and [NL].
Then, following message appears.

SET KEY/LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS (KEY ADRS. , LED ADRS.)


ADDR=_

4) Set PMC ADDRESS for BIT IMAGE.


For example R900 and R910 if you want. Set “R900, R910” [NL].
Then, return to Parameter Screen and following message appears.

: : :
03 OPERATOR PANEL ; YES
KEY/LED ADDRESS ; X0000/Y0000
KEY/LED BIT IMAGE ADRS. ; R0900/R0910
: : :

128
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Notes
1. As a result of above operation, Table 6.7(a), (b), (c) are assigned for
the PMC address as follows.
Xn  X0000 Rk / RI  R0900/ R0910
Xn+1  X0001 Rk+1 / RI+1  R0901/ R0911
Xn+2  X0002 Rk+2 / RI+2  R0902/ R0912
Rk+3 / RI+3  R0903/ R0913
Ym  Y0000 Rk+4 / RI+4  R0904/ R0914
Rk+5 / RI+5  R0905/ R0915
Rk+6 / RI+6  R0906/ R0916
Rk+7 / RI+7  R0907/ R0917
2. In case of I/O card
PMC address in the I/O Card is fixed. Therefore, set the fixed
address for the used signal at operation 3) in above operation.

ex) If X1000, X1001, X1002, Y1000 are used for the key switches
and LEDs, type as follows.

SET KEY/LED ADDRESS (KEY ADRS. , LED ADRS.)


ADDR= X1000, Y1000 [NL]

129
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.8 An I/O card can be used as a built–in I/O unit by inserting it into the slot
on the control unit. The table below lists the I/O cards according to the
I/O CARD number of I/O points and the output format.
CONNECTION
Each I/O card is designed such that a connector panel is used to relay the
signals between the I/O card and terminal block or another connector. In
particular, to facilitate connection to a connector panel, MIL–standard
ribbon–cable connectors are employed as the interface connectors.

Name Drawing number Input Output

I/O card A A16B–2200–0958 40 40


E A16B–2200–0953

I/O card B A16B–2200–0957 80 56


F A16B–2200–0952

I/O card C A16B–2200–0956 104 72


G A16B–2200–0951

I/O card D A16B–2200–0955 + A20B–9001–0480 156 120


utput

H A16B–2200–0950 + A20B–9001–0480
Sink ou

I/O card A A16B–2202–0692 40 40


t–in power ssupply C

I/O card B A16B–2202–0691 80 56


With built–

I/O card C A16B–2202–0690 104 72

I/O card A A16B–2202–0728 40 40


E A16B–2202–0723

I/O card B A16B–2202–0727 80 56


F A16B–2202–0722

I/O card C A16B–2202–0726 104 72


G A16B–2202–0721
Source outputt

I/O card D A16B–2202–0725 + A20B–8001–0150 156 120


H A16B–2202–0720 + A20B–8001–0150

I/O card A A16B–2202–0872 40 40


t–in power ssupply C

I/O card B A16B–2202–0871 80 56


With built–

I/O card C A16B–2202–0870 104 72

130
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Front

Output connector

(Note)
Input connector

Note
An add–on board, indicated by dotted lines in the figure, is
used for I/O cards D and H, which have the largest number
of I/O points.

131
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.8.1 The I/O card has a non–insulated interface with terminals that can be
Input Signal switched between a sink (24V common) and source (0 V common). The
relevant safety standard, however, requires their use as a sink.
Specifications

Capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or greater


Leakage current between contacts of open circuit:
1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts of closed circuit:
2 V or less (including voltage drop in cables)

Connection as sink: Complies


with CE Marking. I/O card
(24 V common)
Contacts
Input signal Filter and level
converter
3.3KΩ
Open : Logical 0
Close : Logical 1 COMn

+24E
+24E

0V

Connection as source
(0 V common)
Input signal Filter and level
converter
3.3KΩ
Open : Logical 1
Closed : Logical 0 COMn

+24E
+24E

0V

Caution
When a source interface is used, a ground fault in an input
signal has the same effect as closing the contacts. From the
viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not recommend
the use of such an interface for input signals. In particular,
input signals X1008.0 to X1008.7 must be connected in a
sink layout, because these signals include the emergency
stop signal.

132
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

The terminals can be switched between a sink and source in 8–bit units.
Input addresses X1011 and X1019 can only, however, be used for a sink.
The table below lists the sink/source switch pins for the 8–bit input
addresses.
Input address Switch pin

X1000.0–X1000.7 COM0
X1001.0–X1001.7 COM1
X1002.0–X1002.7 COM2
X1003.0–X1003.7 COM3
X1004.0–X1004.7 COM4
X1005.0–X1005.7 COM5
X1006.0–X1006.7 COM6
X1007.0–X1007.7 COM7
X1008.0–X1008.7 COM8
X1009.0–X1009.7 COM9
X1010.0–X1010.7 COM10
X1011.0–X1011.7 (Fixed to sink: 24 V common)
X1012.0–X1012.7 COM12
X1013.0–X1013.7 COM13
X1014.0–X1014.7 COM14
X1015.0–X1015.7 COM15
X1016.0–X1016.7 COM16
X1017.0–X1017.7 COM17
X1018.0–X1018.7 COM18
X1019.0–X1019.3 (Fixed to sink: 24 V common)

Use sink type connection (connect COM 8 to 0V) for X1008.0 to


X1008.7.
The figure below illustrates the width and delay of the input signal. For
input addresses X1004 and X1013, however, the response time is no more
than 2 ms because the receivers for the addresses incur only a small delay.

(Signal) (Signal)
DC input signal Logical 1
(18 V or
higher)
Logical 0
(6 V or
lower)
Chattering of
5 ms or less
is ignored.
Receiver
output signal

5 to 22ms 5 to 22ms

133
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.8.2 The output signals of the I/O card (sink type) drive lamps, LEDs, and
Specifications of the relays. The signals are output directly from NPN transistors which form
a non-isolated interface.
Output Signals of the To drive an additional external unit, a power supply of 24 VDC needs to
I/O Card (Sink Type) be supplied by the user. In this case, connect the 0-V terminal to 0V (0-V
terminal in the output connector).

Specifications of the output signals


Maximum load current when output is on :
200 mA or less including momentary current
Saturation voltage when output is on :
1.6 V maximum and 1.0 V average when the load current is 200 mA
Dielectric strength when output is off :
24 V within +20% including surge voltage
Leakage current when output is off : 100µA or less

Connector Indicator
I/O card Transistor output

LED
R

Relay
+
24V
stabilized
power
0V –

Fig. 6.8.2 I/O card (sink type) output signal regulation

Caution
When a sink output interface is used, a ground fault in an
output signal causes the output signal to remain on. From
the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not
recommend the use of such an interface for output signals.

134
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.8.3 This I/O card employs MIL–standard ribbon–cable connectors (50–pin


Connector Layout for and 20–pin). Use equivalent connectors on the cables (such as the
HIF3BB series, manufactured by Hirose Electric).
Sink Output Type I/O
Card Connector specification:
Shall conform to the MIL–C–83503 standard and have a
center polarizing key.

Standard I/O card

I/O

I/O card
Function Abbreviation Connetor No. A B C D
L M R No. of pins
Right (R)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DO-1 C54 50 f f f f
Center (M)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 DO-2 C55 50 f f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 DO-3 C58 50 f

Right (R)
DIGITAL INPUT 1 DI-1 C50 50 f f f f
Cneter (M)
DIGITAL INPUT 2 DI-2 C51 50 f f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL INPUT 5 DI-5 C56 50 f

Right (R)
DIGITAL INPUT 3 DI-3 C52 20 f f
Center (M)
DIGITAL INPUT 4 DI-4 C53 20 f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL INPUT 6 DI-6 C57 20 f

Note) A circle indicates that the connector is mounted on the card.

Polarizing keys ( in the figure) are provided to the right of the left–most
three connectors (C56 to C58) and to the left of other connectors (C50 to
C55).

135
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

I/O card with built–in


power supply C

I/O

PSU

I/O card
Function Abbreviation Connector No. A B C
L R No. of pins
Right (R)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DO-1 C54 50 f f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 DO-2 C55 50 f f

Right (R)
DIGITAL INPUT 1 DI-1 C50 50 f f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL INPUT 2 DI-2 C51 50 f f

Right (R)
DIGITAL INPUT 3 DI-3 C52 20 f
Left (L)
DIGITAL INPUT 4 DI-4 C53 20 f

Note) A circle indicates that the connector is mounted on the card.

136
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.8.4
Input Signal Connector
Pin Layout for Sink
Output Type I/O Card

Connector No. C50 Connector No. C51 Connector No. C56

A B A B A B
01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V
02 X1005.0 X1005.1 02 X1000.0 X1000.1 02 X1013.0 X1013.1
03 X1005.2 X1005.3 03 X1000.2 X1000.3 03 X1013.2 X1013.3
04 X1005.4 X1005.5 04 X1000.4 X1000.5 04 X1013.4 X1013.5
05 X1005.6 X1005.7 05 X1000.6 X1000.7 05 X1013.6 X1013.7
06 COM5 COM6 06 COM0 COM1 06 COM13 COM14
07 X1006.0 X1006.1 07 X1001.0 X1001.1 07 X1014.0 X1014.1
08 X1006.2 X1006.3 08 X1001.2 X1001.3 08 X1014.2 X1014.3
09 X1006.4 X1006.5 09 X1001.4 X1001.5 09 X1014.4 X1014.5
10 X1006.6 X1006.7 10 X1001.6 X1001.7 10 X1014.6 X1014.7
11 X1007.0 X1007.1 11 X1002.0 X1002.1 11 X1015.0 X1015.1
12 X1007.2 X1007.3 12 X1002.2 X1002.3 12 X1015.2 X1015.3
13 X1007.4 X1007.5 13 X1002.4 X1002.5 13 X1015.4 X1015.5
14 X1007.6 X1007.7 14 X1002.6 X1002.7 14 X1015.6 X1015.7
15 COM7 COM8 15 COM2 COM3 15 COM15 COM16
16 X1008.0 X1008.1 16 X1003.0 X1003.1 16 X1016.0 X1016.1
17 X1008.2 X1008.3 17 X1003.2 X1003.3 17 X1016.2 X1016.3
18 X1008.4 X1008.5 18 X1003.4 X1003.5 18 X1016.4 X1016.5
19 X1008.6 X1008.7 19 X1003.6 X1003.7 19 X1016.6 X1016.7
20 X1009.0 X1009.1 20 X1004.0 X1004.1 20 X1017.0 X1017.1
21 X1009.2 X1009.3 21 X1004.2 X1004.3 21 X1017.2 X1017.3
22 X1009.4 X1009.5 22 X1004.4 X1004.5 22 X1017.4 X1017.5
23 X1009.6 X1009.7 23 X1004.6 X1004.7 23 X1017.6 X1017.7
24 COM9 0V 24 COM4 0V 24 COM17 0V
25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V

137
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Connector No. C52 Connector No. C53 Connector No. C57

A B A B A B
01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V
02 X1010.0 X1010.1 02 X1012.0 X1012.1 02 X1018.0 X1018.1
03 X1010.2 X1010.3 03 X1012.2 X1012.3 03 X1018.2 X1018.3
04 X1010.4 X1010.5 04 X1012.4 X1012.5 04 X1018.4 X1018.5
05 X1010.6 X1010.7 05 X1012.6 X1012.7 05 X1018.6 X1018.7
06 COM10 +5V 06 COM12 +5V 06 COM18 0V
07 X1011.0 X1011.1 07 X1011.4 X1011.5 07 X1019.0 X1019.1
08 X1011.2 X1011.3 08 X1011.6 X1011.7 08 X1019.2 X1019.3
09 +15V 0V 09 +5V 0V 09 0V 0V
10 0V -15V 10 0V +5V 10 0V 0V

Note
The +15V, –15V, and +5V pins shall not be used.

138
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.8.5
Output Signal
Connector Pin Layout
for Sink Output Type
I/O Card

Connector No. C54 Connector No. C55 Connector No. C58

A B A B A B
01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V
02 02 02
03 Y1000.0 Y1000.1 03 Y1005.0 Y1005.1 03 Y1010.0 Y1010.1
04 Y1000.2 Y1000.3 04 Y1005.2 Y1005.3 04 Y1010.2 Y1010.3
05 Y1000.4 Y1000.5 05 Y1005.4 Y1005.5 05 Y1010.4 Y1010.5
06 Y1000.6 Y1000.7 06 Y1005.6 Y1005.7 06 Y1010.6 Y1010.7
07 Y1001.0 Y1001.1 07 Y1006.0 Y1006.1 07 Y1011.0 Y1011.1
08 Y1001.2 Y1001.3 08 Y1006.2 Y1006.3 08 Y1011.2 Y1011.3
09 Y1001.4 Y1001.5 09 Y1006.4 Y1006.5 09 Y1011.4 Y1011.5
10 Y1001.6 Y1001.7 10 Y1006.6 Y1006.7 10 Y1011.6 Y1011.7
11 Y1002.0 Y1002.1 11 Y1007.0 Y1007.1 11 Y1012.0 Y1012.1
12 Y1002.2 Y1002.3 12 Y1007.2 Y1007.3 12 Y1012.2 Y1012.3
13 Y1002.4 Y1002.5 13 Y1007.4 Y1007.5 13 Y1012.4 Y1012.5
14 Y1002.6 Y1002.7 14 Y1007.6 Y1007.7 14 Y1012.6 Y1012.7
15 Y1003.0 Y1003.1 15 Y1008.0 Y1008.1 15 Y1013.0 Y1013.1
16 Y1003.2 Y1003.3 16 Y1008.2 Y1008.3 16 Y1013.2 Y1013.3
17 Y1003.4 Y1003.5 17 Y1008.4 Y1008.5 17 Y1013.4 Y1013.5
18 Y1003.6 Y1003.7 18 Y1008.6 Y1008.7 18 Y1013.6 Y1013.7
19 Y1004.0 Y1004.1 19 Y1009.0 Y1009.1 19 Y1014.0 Y1014.1
20 Y1004.2 Y1004.3 20 Y1009.2 Y1009.3 20 Y1014.2 Y1014.3
21 Y1004.4 Y1004.5 21 Y1009.4 Y1009.5 21 Y1014.4 Y1014.5
22 Y1004.6 Y1004.7 22 Y1009.6 Y1009.7 22 Y1014.6 Y1014.7
23 0V 0V 23 0V 0V 23 0V 0V
24 0V 0V 24 0V 0V 24 0V 0V
25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V

139
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

6.8.6 Signals of the I/O card are allocated to addresses X1000.0-X1019.3


Address Mapping of (Input) and Y1000.0-Y1014.7 (Output). PMC uses these addresses.
There are four kinds of I/O cards available, and each I/O card covers a
I/O Card (Sink Type) specific range (see below).
Select the appropriate I/O card according to the I/O points required for the
machine interface and allocate interface signals within the range for that
card.

Notes
1. X1004, X1008, and X1009 are used for signals that are
directly referred to by the CNC. When these functions are
used, no other interface signals can be allocated to these
addresses.
2. A receiver of short delay time (less than 2ms) is used for
signals in addresses X1004 and X1013 to receive skip
signal at high speed.

Address range of
I/O card A to D 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X1000
X1001
X1002
X1003
B X1004 (Note 1, 2)
X1005
C X1006
X1007

X1008 (Note 1) Input signal
X1009 (Note 1) from the
D X1010 machine
X1011 side
X1012
X1013 (Note 2)
X1014
X1015
X1016
X1017
X1018
X1019

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Y1000
Y1001
A Y1002
Y1003 Output
B
Y1004 signal to the
C Y1005 machine
Y1006 side
D Y1007
Y1008
Y1009
Y1010
Y1011
Y1012
Y1013
Y1014

140
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Input signal MT→PMC In the figure below, bits filled with signal names are reserved for signals
sent directly to the CNC as well as being sent to the PMC. Machine
interface signals can be allocated freely to the other bits, shown as empty.
Bits used for reserved signals cannot be used for other signals.

Address Bit No. Connector


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pin
number
X1000

C51-B05 C51-A05 C51-B04 C51-A04 C51-B03 C51-A03 C51-B02 C51-A02

X1001

C51-B10 C51-A10 C51-B09 C51-A09 C51-B08 C51-A08 C51-B07 C51-A07

X1002

C51-B14 C51-A14 C51-B13 C51-A13 C51-B12 C51-A12 C51-B11 C51-A11

X1003
I/O
card C51-B19 C51-A19 C51-B18 C51-A18 C51-B17 C51-A17 C51-B16 C51-A16
D
I/O (16/18-TB)
SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
card X1004
C
SKIP ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE (16/18-MB)

C51-B23 C51-A23 C51-B22 C51-A22 C51-B21 C51-A21 C51-B20 C51-A20


I/O
card
B X1005

C50-B05 C50-A05 C50-B04 C50-A04 C50-B03 C50-A03 C50-B02 C50-A02

X1006

C50-B10 C50-A10 C50-B09 C50-A09 C50-B08 C50-A08 C50-B07 C50-A07

I/O X1007
card
A
C50-B14 C50-A14 C50-B13 C50-A13 C50-B12 C50-A12 C50-B11 C50-A11

X1008 *ESP

C50-B19 C50-A19 C50-B18 C50-A18 C50-B17 C50-A17 C50-B16 C50-A16

X1009 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1

C50-B23 C50-A23 C50-B22 C50-A22 C50-B21 C50-A21 C50-B20 C50-A20


Continued on next page

141
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Address Bit No.


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

X1010

C52-B05 C52-A05 C52-B04 C52-A04 C52-B03 C52-A03 C52-B02 C52-A02

I/O X1011
card
C
C53-B08 C53-A08 C53-B07 C53-A07 C52-B08 C52-A08 C52-B07 C52-A07

X1012

C53-B05 C53-A05 C53-B04 C53-A04 C53-B03 C53-A03 C53-B02 C53-A02

X1013
I/O
card C56-B05 C56-A05 C56-B04 C56-A04 C56-B03 C56-A03 C56-B02 C56-A02
D

X1014

C56-B10 C56-A10 C56-B09 C56-A09 C56-B08 C56-A08 C56-B07 C56-A07

X1015

C56-B14 C56-A14 C56-B13 C56-A13 C56-B12 C56-A12 C56-B11 C56-A11

X1016

C56-B19 C56-A19 C56-B18 C56-A18 C56-B17 C56-A17 C56-B16 C56-A16

X1017

C56-B23 C56-A23 C56-B22 C56-A22 C56-B21 C56-A21 C56-B20 C56-A20

X1018

C57-B05 C57-A05 C57-B04 C57-A04 C57-B03 C57-A03 C57-B02 C57-A02

X1019

C57-B08 C57-A08 C57-B07 C57-A07

142
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Output signal PMC→MT

Address Bit No.


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Y1000

C54-B06 C54-A06 C54-B05 C54-A05 C54-B04 C54-A04 C54-B03 C54-A03

Y1001

I/O C54-B10 C54-A10 C54-B09 C54-A09 C54-B08 C54-A08 C54-B07 C54-A07


card
A
Y1002

I/O C54-B14 C54-A14 C54-B13 C54-A13 C54-B12 C54-A12 C54-B11 C54-A11


card
B
Y1003

I/O
C54-B18 C54-A18 C54-B17 C54-A17 C54-B16 C54-A16 C54-B15 C54-A15
card
C
Y1004

I/O C54-B22 C54-A22 C54-B21 C54-A21 C54-B20 C54-A20 C54-B19 C54-A19


card
D
Y1005

C55-B06 C55-A06 C55-B05 C55-A05 C55-B04 C55-A04 C55-B03 C55-A03

Y1006

C55-B10 C55-A10 C55-B09 C55-A09 C55-B08 C55-A08 C55-B07 C55-A07

Y1007

C55-B14 C55-A14 C55-B13 C55-A13 C55-B12 C55-A12 C55-B11 C55-A11

Y1008

C55-B18 C55-A18 C55-B17 C55-A17 C55-B16 C55-A16 C55-B15 C55-A15

Y1009

Continued on next page C55-B22 C55-A22 C55-B21 C55-A21 C55-B20 C55-A20 C55-B19 C55-A19

143
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Address Bit No.


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Y1010

C58-B06 C58-A06 C58-B05 C58-A05 C58-B04 C58-A04 C58-B03 C58-A03

I/O
card Y1011
D
C58-B10 C58-A10 C58-B09 C58-A09 C58-B08 C58-A08 C58-B07 C58-A07

Y1012

C58-B14 C58-A14 C58-B13 C58-A13 C58-B12 C58-A12 C58-B11 C58-A11

Y1013

C58-B18 C58-A18 C58-B17 C58-A17 C58-B16 C58-A16 C58-B15 C58-A15

Y1014

C58-B22 C58-A22 C58-B21 C58-A21 C58-B20 C58-A20 C58-B19 C58-A19

144
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.9
SOURCE OUTPUT I/O
CARD

6.9.1 Refer to 6.6.1 “I/O signal regulation”.


Input Signal
Specifications

6.9.2 The output signal specifications are as follows:


Output Signal
Specifications Maximum load current when driver is turned on: 200 mA (including mo-
mentary value)
Saturation voltage when driver is turned on: 1.0 V max.
Withstand voltage: 24 V +20% (including
momentary value)
Leakage current when driver is turned off: 100 A

For output signals, use an external power supply having the following
specification:

Supply voltage: +24 V "10%


Supply current (per board): Total maximum load current including mo-
mentary value + 150 mA, or higher
Power–on: At the same time as or before power–on of
the control unit
Power–off: At the same time as or after power–off of
the control unit

Note
Connect a power supply which satisfies the above
specifications to the output signal power supply terminal,
DO common (DOCOM, DOCOM 0, DOCOM 5, DOCOM
10). The maximum current capacity of each pin of the DO
common terminal is 0.7 A. The total load current must not
exceed the maximum current which can be supplied from
the DO common terminal.

145
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Observe the following precautions when connecting the output signals:


Output pins shall not be connected in parallel, as shown below.

I/O card
DOCOM0 or DOCOM or
DOCOM5 or DOCOM10

DOCOM0 or DOCOM or
+24V 0V
DOCOM5 or DOCOM10

DV

+24V 0V

DV

When using a dimming resistor, connect a diode to prevent leakage.

I/O card
DOCOM0 or DOCOM or
DOCOM5 or DOCOM10

+24V 0V

Dimming
resistor

Lamp

DV
Leakage prevention diode

146
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.9.3 This I/O card employs MIL–standard ribbon–cable connectors (50–pin


Connector Layout for and 20–pin). Use equivalent connectors on the cables (such as the
HIF3BB series, manufactured by Hirose Electric).
Source Output Type I/O
Card Connector specification:
Shall conform to the MIL–C–83503 standard and have a
center polarizing key.

Standard I/O card

I/O

I/O card
Function Abbreviation Connector No. of
L M R No. pins A B C D
Right (R)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DO-1 C74 50 f f f f
Center (M)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 DO-2 C75 50 f f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 3 DO-3 C78 50 f

Right (R)
DIGITAL INPUT 1 DI-1 C70 50 f f f f
Center (M)
DIGITAL INPUT 2 DI-2 C71 50 f f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL INPUT 5 DI-5 C76 50 f

Right (R)
DIGITAL INPUT 3 DI-3 C72 20 f f
Center (M)
DIGITAL INPUT 4 DI-4 C73 20 f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL INPUT 6 DI-6 C77 20 f

Note) A circle indicates that the connector is mounted on the card.

Polarizing keys ( in the figure) are provided to the right of the left–most
three connectors (C76 to C78) and to the left of the other connectors (C70
to C75).

147
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

I/O card with built–in


power supply C

I/O

PSU

I/O Card
Function Abbrebiation Connector No. of
L R No. pins A B C
Right (R)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DO-1 C74 50 f f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 DO-2 C75 50 f f

Right (R)
DIGITAL INPUT 1 DI-1 C70 50 f f f
Left (L)
DIGITAL INPUT 2 DI-2 C71 50 f f

Right (R)
DIGITAL INPUT 3 DI-3 C72 20 f
Left (L)
DIGITAL INPUT 4 DI-4 C73 20 f

Note) A circle indicates that the connector is mounted on the card.

148
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.9.4
Input Signal Connector
Pin Layout for Source
Output Type I/O Card

Connector No. C70 Connector No. C71 Connector No. C76

A B A B A B
01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V
02 X1005.0 X1005.1 02 X1000.0 X1000.1 02 X1013.0 X1013.1
03 X1005.2 X1005.3 03 X1000.2 X1000.3 03 X1013.2 X1013.3
04 X1005.4 X1005.5 04 X1000.4 X1000.5 04 X1013.4 X1013.5
05 X1005.6 X1005.7 05 X1000.6 X1000.7 05 X1013.6 X1013.7
06 COM5 COM6 06 COM0 COM1 06 COM13 COM14
07 X1006.0 X1006.1 07 X1001.0 X1001.1 07 X1014.0 X1014.1
08 X1006.2 X1006.3 08 X1001.2 X1001.3 08 X1014.2 X1014.3
09 X1006.4 X1006.5 09 X1001.4 X1001.5 09 X1014.4 X1014.5
10 X1006.6 X1006.7 10 X1001.6 X1001.7 10 X1014.6 X1014.7
11 X1007.0 X1007.1 11 X1002.0 X1002.1 11 X1015.0 X1015.1
12 X1007.2 X1007.3 12 X1002.2 X1002.3 12 X1015.2 X1015.3
13 X1007.4 X1007.5 13 X1002.4 X1002.5 13 X1015.4 X1015.5
14 X1007.6 X1007.7 14 X1002.6 X1002.7 14 X1015.6 X1015.7
15 COM7 COM8 15 COM2 COM3 15 COM15 COM16
16 X1008.0 X1008.1 16 X1003.0 X1003.1 16 X1016.0 X1016.1
17 X1008.2 X1008.3 17 X1003.2 X1003.3 17 X1016.2 X1016.3
18 X1008.4 X1008.5 18 X1003.4 X1003.5 18 X1016.4 X1016.5
19 X1008.6 X1008.7 19 X1003.6 X1003.7 19 X1016.6 X1016.7
20 X1009.0 X1009.1 20 X1004.0 X1004.1 20 X1017.0 X1017.1
21 X1009.2 X1009.3 21 X1004.2 X1004.3 21 X1017.2 X1017.3
22 X1009.4 X1009.5 22 X1004.4 X1004.5 22 X1017.4 X1017.5
23 X1009.6 X1009.7 23 X1004.6 X1004.7 23 X1017.6 X1017.7
24 COM9 0V 24 COM4 0V 24 COM17 0V
25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V 25 0V 0V

149
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Connector No. C72 Connector No. C73 Connector No. C77

A B A B A B
01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V 01 +24V +24V
02 X1010.0 X1010.1 02 X1012.0 X1012.1 02 X1018.0 X1018.1
03 X1010.2 X1010.3 03 X1012.2 X1012.3 03 X1018.2 X1018.3
04 X1010.4 X1010.5 04 X1012.4 X1012.5 04 X1018.4 X1018.5
05 X1010.6 X1010.7 05 X1012.6 X1012.7 05 X1018.6 X1018.7
06 COM10 +5V 06 COM12 +5V 06 COM18 0V
07 X1011.0 X1011.1 07 X1011.4 X1011.5 07 X1019.0 X1019.1
08 X1011.2 X1011.3 08 X1011.6 X1011.7 08 X1019.2 X1019.3
09 +15V 0V 09 +5V 0V 09 0V 0V
10 0V -15V 10 0V +5V 10 0V 0V

Note
The +15V, –15V, and +5V pins shall not be used.

150
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.9.5
Output Signal
Connector Pin Layout
for Source Output Type
I/O Card

Connector No. C74 Connector No. C75 Connector No. C78

A B A B A B
01 +0V +0V 01 +0V +0V 01 +0V +0V
02 DOCOM0 DOCOM0 02 DOCOM5 DOCOM5 02 DOCOM10 DOCOM10
03 Y1000.0 Y1000.1 03 Y1005.0 Y1005.1 03 Y1010.0 Y1010.1
04 Y1000.2 Y1000.3 04 Y1005.2 Y1005.3 04 Y1010.2 Y1010.3
05 Y1000.4 Y1000.5 05 Y1005.4 Y1005.5 05 Y1010.4 Y1010.5
06 Y1000.6 Y1000.7 06 Y1005.6 Y1005.7 06 Y1010.6 Y1010.7
07 Y1001.0 Y1001.1 07 Y1006.0 Y1006.1 07 Y1011.0 Y1011.1
08 Y1001.2 Y1001.3 08 Y1006.2 Y1006.3 08 Y1011.2 Y1011.3
09 Y1001.4 Y1001.5 09 Y1006.4 Y1006.5 09 Y1011.4 Y1011.5
10 Y1001.6 Y1001.7 10 Y1006.6 Y1006.7 10 Y1011.6 Y1011.7
11 Y1002.0 Y1002.1 11 Y1007.0 Y1007.1 11 Y1012.0 Y1012.1
12 Y1002.2 Y1002.3 12 Y1007.2 Y1007.3 12 Y1012.2 Y1012.3
13 Y1002.4 Y1002.5 13 Y1007.4 Y1007.5 13 Y1012.4 Y1012.5
14 Y1002.6 Y1002.7 14 Y1007.6 Y1007.7 14 Y1012.6 Y1012.7
15 Y1003.0 Y1003.1 15 Y1008.0 Y1008.1 15 Y1013.0 Y1013.1
16 Y1003.2 Y1003.3 16 Y1008.2 Y1008.3 16 Y1013.2 Y1013.3
17 Y1003.4 Y1003.5 17 Y1008.4 Y1008.5 17 Y1013.4 Y1013.5
18 Y1003.6 Y1003.7 18 Y1008.6 Y1008.7 18 Y1013.6 Y1013.7
19 Y1004.0 Y1004.1 19 Y1009.0 Y1009.1 19 Y1014.0 Y1014.1
20 Y1004.2 Y1004.3 20 Y1009.2 Y1009.3 20 Y1014.2 Y1014.3
21 Y1004.4 Y1004.5 21 Y1009.4 Y1009.5 21 Y1014.4 Y1014.5
22 Y1004.6 Y1004.7 22 Y1009.6 Y1009.7 22 Y1014.6 Y1014.7
23 DOCOM DOCOM 23 DOCOM DOCOM 23 DOCOM10 DOCOM10
24 DOCOM DOCOM 24 DOCOM DOCOM 24 DOCOM10 DOCOM10
25 DOCOM DOCOM 25 DOCOM DOCOM 25 DOCOM10 DOCOM10

151
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

DO common corresponding to each output signal


Output signal DO common Output signal DO common
Y1000.0–Y1000.7 DOCOM0 Y1010.0–Y1010.7

Y1001.0–Y1001.7 Y1011.0–Y1011.7

Y1002.0–Y1002.7 Y1012.0–Y1012.7 DOCOM10


DOCOM
Y1003.0–Y1003.7 Y1013.0–Y1013.7

Y1004.0–Y1004.7 Y1014.0–Y1014.7

Y1005.0–Y1005.7 DOCOM5

Y1006.0–Y1006.7

Y1007.0–Y1007.7
DOCOM
Y1008.0–Y1008.7

Y1009.0–Y1009.7

152
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.9.6 The PMC addresses assigned to this I/O card start from X1000.0 for input
Address map signals and from Y1000.0 for output signals. The I/O card is classified
into eight types, A to H, according to the number of I/O lines. The
following addresses are assigned to each type:

Input Signal

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X1000
X1001
X1002
B or F
X1003
X1004 (Note 1)(Note 2)
X1005
C or G
X1006
A or E X1007
X1008 (Note 1)
D or H
X1009 (Note 1)
X1010
X1011
X1012
X1013 (Note 2)
X1014
X1015
X1016
X1017
X1018
X1019

Notes
1. Addresses X1004, X1008, and X1009 are assigned to
those signals which are directly referenced by the CNC.
When these signals are used, the addresses cannot be
assigned to other interface signals.
2. Small–delay receivers are used for addresses X1004 and
X1013.

153
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Output Signal

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Y1000
Y1001
A or E Y1002
B or F Y1003
Y1004
C or G
Y1005
Y1006
D or H Y1007
Y1008
Y1009
Y1010
Y1011
Y1012
Y1013
Y1014

154
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Input signal MT→PMC The bits with a signal name in the table are used for fixed address signals
which are directly referenced by the CNC. Other bits can be assigned to
arbitrary machine interface signals. When a fixed address signal is used,
the corresponding bit cannot be used for other interface signals.

Address Bit No. Connector


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pin
number
X1000

C71–B05 C71-A05 C71-B04 C71-A04 C71-B03 C71-A03 C71-B02 C71-A02

X1001

C71-B10 C71-A10 C71-B09 C71-A09 C71-B08 C71-A08 C71-B07 C71-A07

X1002

C71-B14 C71-A14 C71-B13 C71-A13 C71-B12 C71-A12 C71-B11 C71-A11

I/O
card X1003
D or H
C71-B19 C71-A19 C71-B18 C71-A18 C71-B17 C71-A17 C71-B16 C71-A16

I/O (T series)
SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
card X1004
C or G
SKIP ESKIP ZAE YAE XAE (M series)

C71-B23 C71-A23 C71-B22 C71-A22 C71-B21 C71-A21 C71-B20 C71-A20


I/O
card
B or F X1005

C70-B05 C70-A05 C70-B04 C70-A04 C70-B03 C70-A03 C70-B02 C70-A02

X1006

C70-B10 C70-A10 C70-B09 C70-A09 C70-B08 C70-A08 C70-B07 C70-A07

I/O X1007
card
A or E
C70-B14 C70-A14 C70-B13 C70-A13 C70-B12 C70-A12 C70-B11 C70-A11

X1008 *ESP

C70-B19 C70-A19 C70-B18 C70-A18 C70-B17 C70-A17 C70-B16 C70-A16

X1009 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1

C70-B23 C70-A23 C70-B22 C70-A22 C70-B21 C70-A21 C70-B20 C70-A20


Continued on next page

155
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Address Bit No. Connector


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pin
number
X1010

C72–B05 C72-A05 C72-B04 C72-A04 C72-B03 C72-A03 C72-B02 C72-A02


I/O
card X1011
C or G
C73-B08 C73-A08 C73-B07 C73-A07 C72-B08 C72-A08 C72-B07 C72-A07

X1012

C73-B05 C73-A05 C73-B04 C73-A04 C73-B03 C73-A03 C73-B02 C73-A02

X1013

C76-B05 C76-A05 C76-B04 C76-A04 C76-B03 C76-A03 C76-B02 C76-A02

I/O X1014
card
D or H
C76-B10 C76-A10 C76-B09 C76-A09 C76-B08 C76-A08 C76-B07 C76-A07

X1015

C76-B14 C76-A14 C76-B13 C76-A13 C76-B12 C76-A12 C76-B11 C76-A11

X1016

C76-B19 C76-A19 C76-B18 C76-A18 C76-B17 C76-A17 C76-B16 C76-A16

X1017

C76-B23 C76-A23 C76-B22 C76-A22 C76-B21 C76-A21 C76-B20 C76-A20

X1018

C77-B05 C77-A05 C77-B04 C77-A04 C77-B03 C77-A03 C77-B02 C77-A02

X1019

C77-B08 C77-A08 C77-B07 C77-A07

156
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

Output signal PMC→MT

Address Bit No. Connector


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pin
number
Y1000

C74-B06 C74-A06 C74-B05 C74-A05 C74-B04 C74-A04 C74-B03 C74-A03

Y100
1
I/O C74-B10 C74-A10 C74-B09 C74-A09 C74-B08 C74-A08 C74-B07 C74-A07
card
A or E
Y100
2
I/O C74-B14 C74-A14 C74-B13 C74-A13 C74-B12 C74-A12 C74-B11 C74-A11
card
B or F
Y1003

I/O
C74-B18 C74-A18 C74-B17 C74-A17 C74-B16 C74-A16 C74-B15 C74-A15
card
C or E
Y1004

I/O C74-B22 C74-A22 C74-B21 C74-A21 C74-B20 C74-A20 C74-B19 C74-A19


card
D or H
Y1005

C75-B06 C75-A06 C75-B05 C75-A05 C75-B04 C75-A04 C75-B03 C75-A03

Y1006

C75-B10 C75-A10 C75-B09 C75-A09 C75-B08 C75-A08 C75-B07 C75-A07

Y1007

C75-B14 C75-A14 C75-B13 C75-A13 C75-B12 C75-A12 C75-B11 C75-A11

Y1008

C75-B18 C75-A18 C75-B17 C75-A17 C75-B16 C75-A16 C75-B15 C75-A15

Y1009

C75-B22 C75-A22 C75-B21 C75-A21 C75-B20 C75-A20 C75-B19 C75-A19

Continued on next page

157
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Address Bit No. Connector


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pin
number
Y1010

C78-B06 C78-A06 C78-B05 C78-A05 C78-B04 C78-A04 C78-B03 C78-A03

Y1011

I/O C78-B10 C78-A10 C78-B09 C78-A09 C78-B08 C78-A08 C78-B07 C78-A07


card
D or H
Y1012

C78-B14 C78-A14 C78-B13 C78-A13 C78-B12 C78-A12 C78-B11 C78-A11

Y1013

C78-B18 C78-A18 C78-B17 C78-A17 C78-B16 C78-A16 C78-B15 C78-A15

Y1014

C78-B22 C78-A22 C78-B21 C78-A21 C78-B20 C78-A20 C78-B19 C78-A19

158
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
B–62753EN/01 MACHINE INTERFACE

6.10 When the number of DI/DO points is insufficient with one I/O card, two
I/O cards can be used. The sink type and source type I/O cards can be used
USE OF TWO I/O in any combination.
CARDS

6.10.1 The specifications are the same as for one I/O card.
Specifications of Input
and Output Signals

6.10.2 Addresses viewed from the PMC are as follows:


I/O Card Address Map

I/O I/O
card card Main PWR
2 1

Fig. 6.10.2 Front View of the Rack

Addresses assigned to Input (DI) addresses: X1000.0 to X1019.3


I/O card (I/O card 1) Output (DO) addresses: Y1000.0 to Y1014.7
nearer inserted in the
slot than the other card
to the Main PC board

Addresses assigned to Input (DI) addresses: X1020.0 to X1039.3


I/O card (I/O card 2) Output (DO) addresses: Y1020.0 to Y1034.7
farther inserted in the
slot than the other card
from the Main PC board

6.10.3 The following figures show addresses assigned to each I/O card
Addresses Assigned to depending on the number of I/O points.
Each I/O Card
Notes
1. The signals which the NC references directly are stored at
X1004, X1008, and X1009. When using the function for
referencing these signals, do not assign other interface
signals to these addresses.
2. A high–speed receiver (with a delay of 2 ms or less) is used
for manipulating data at X1004, X1013, X1024, and X1033.

159
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE B–62753EN/01

Input signal
 I/O card 1  I/O card 2
76543210 76543210
X1000 X1020
C X1001 C X1021
X1002 X1022
X1003 X1023
B X1004 (Note 1, 2) B X1024 (Note 2)
X1005 X1025
X1006 X1026
A X1007 A X1027
X1008 (Note 1) X1028
D X1009 (Note 1) D X1029
X1010 X1030
X1011 X1031
X1012 X1032
X1013 (Note 2) X1033 (Note 2)
X1014 X1034
X1015 X1035
X1016 X1036
X1017 X1037
X1018 X1038
X1019 X1039

Output signal
 I/O card 1  I/O card 2
76543210 76543210
Y1000 Y1020
A Y1001 A Y1021
Y1002 Y1022
B Y1003 B Y1023
Y1004 Y1024
C Y1005 C Y1025
Y1006 Y1026
D Y1007 D Y1027
Y1008 Y1028
Y1009 Y1029
Y1010 Y1030
Y1011 Y1031
Y1012 Y1032
Y1013 Y1033
Y1014 Y1034

160
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

161
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.1
CRT/MDI UNIT
INTERFACE
7.1.1
Outline

When 9″CRT/MDI or
9″PDP/MDI is used
(MMC–IV cannot be
9″CRT/MDI unit
used) 9″PDP/MDI unit

Power supply ON/OFF button


unit CP4
ON
ON1 ON button
COM
Short ON2
OFF
OFF1 OFF button
OFF2

CRT, PDPunit

CP2, CP3 or CN2 CRT, PDP power


CP5

Main CPU board


JA1 CN1 Video input

Soft key cable

Keyboard PCB

JA2 CK2

CK1

Protective ground.
Be sure to connect.

162
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

When 14″CRT/MDI is
used (MMC–IV cannot be
used)
14″CRT/MDI unit

Power supply ON/OFF button


unit CP4
ON
ON1
COM ON button
Short ON2
OFF
OFF1
OFF button
OFF2

CRT, LCD unit

CP2 or CP3 CN2(CRT)CRT power

CP5 CP5(VGA board)

Main CPU board


JA1 JN1 Video input

JA2

Soft key cable


JA2 (Note)
Keyboard PCB

CK2

CK1

Protective grouond.
Be sure to connect.

Note
The cable between JA2 and CK1 is already connected at
shipment from FANUC.

163
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

When LCD/MDI is used


(MMC–IV cannot be
used)
LCD/MDI unit

Power supply ON/OFF button


unit CP4
ON
ON1 ON button
COM
Short ON2
OFF
OFF1 OFF button
OFF2

CRT, LCD unit

CP5 CP5 LCD power

Main CPU board


JA1 JN1 Video input

JA2

Soft key cable


JA2 (Note)
Keyboard PCB

CK2

CK1

Protective ground.
Be sure to connect.

Note
For MDI integrated unit, the cable between JA2 and CK1 is
already connected at shipment from FANUC.

164
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

When MMC–IV is
provided without NC’s
graphic function 14″CRT/MDI unit (analog)
9.5″LCD/MDI unit (analog)

Power supply ON/OFFbutton


unit CP4
ON
ON1 ON button
COM
Short ON2
OFF
OFF1 OFF button
OFF2

CRT, LCD unit

CP2, CP3 or CP5 CP11(CRT)CRT, LCD


CP5(LCD) power

Main CPU board


JA1 JA1 video input

Soft kye cable


JA2
Keyboard PCB
MMC–IV board
CK2
JA1A

CK1

JA1B

Protective ground.
Be sure to connect.

165
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

When MMC–IV is
provided with NC’s
graphic function 14″CRT/MDI unit (analog)
9.5″LCD/MDI unit (analog)

Power supply unit ON/OFF button


CP4
ON
ON1 ON button
COM
Short ON2
OFF
OFF1 OFF button
OFF2

CRT, LCD unit


CP2, CP3, CP5
CN2(CRT)CRT, LCD
CP5(LCD) power

Control unit graphic


board
JA1A JA1 video input

Soft key cable


JA1B
Keyboard PCB
Main CPU board
CK2
JA1

CK1

JA2

MMC–IV board
JA1A

Protective ground.
Be sure to connect.

JA1B

166
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.1.2
CRT, PDP or LCD
Display Interface

9″ CRT or PDP display


interface

CNC ″ 
  ″   

JA1 HIROSE CN1


FI40A–20S
(PCR-EV20MDT) (MR-20RM)
(Connector)
1 VDR 11 FI–20–CV5 1 VDR 14
(Case) 8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 HSYNC 15
9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17 0V
HONDA 11 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 18 0V
MR–20FH 12 0V
6 0V 16 0V (Connector) 6 19
13
7 17 MR–20LFH 7 20
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC (Case)
9 19 (In case of
9″ color
10 20
CRT, 9″
mono–
( ) : Signals not used chrome
CP2 1 200A PDP) 1 200A
CN2
or 2 200B 2 200B
(SMS3RK-3TK2)
CP3 3 G 3 G

CP5 1 +24V 1 CN2


2 0V 2 (SMS6RN-4)
3 (In case of 3
9”mono- 4 0V
chrome
5 +24V
CRT)
6
Be sure to connect
the protective ground. Ground

Cable wiring

1 1
VDR VDR
2 8
0V 0V
3 4
VDG VDG
4 11
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 18
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
14 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
16 10
0V 0V

Recommended cable material


A66L–0001–0371 … Coaxial cable (MAx. 50m)

167
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

9″ PDP display interface


for CE marking
CNC PDP unit

JA1 HIROSE CN1


FI40A–20S
(PCR-EV20MDT) (Connector) (MR-20RM)
1 VDR 11 FI–20–CV5 1 VDR 14
(Case) 8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 HSYNC 15
9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17 0V
HONDA 11 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 18 0V
MR–20LFH 12 0V
6 0V 16 0V (Case) 6 19
13
7 17 MR–20FH 7 20
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC (Connector)
9 19
J.S.T. LTD
10 20 VHR–2N
(Housing)
( ) : Signals not used SVH–21T–I.1
(Contact)
CP5 1 +24V 1 +24V CN2 (B2P–VH)
2 0V 2 0V
3

Be sure to connect Ground


the protective ground.

Cable wiring

1 1
VDR VDR
2 8
0V 0V
3 4
VDG VDG
4 11
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 18
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
14 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
16 10
0V 0V

Recommended cable material


A66L–0001–0371 … Coaxial cable (MAx. 50m)

168
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

14″ CRT, LCD display


interface
14″CRT/MDI unit
CNC LCD/MDI unit

JA1 JN1
(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR-EV20MDT)
HIROSE
1 RXD 11 FI40A–20S(Connector) 1 TXD 11
2 0V 12 TXD FI–20–CV5(Case) 2 0V 12 RXD
3 13 3 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 *RXD 15 5 *TXD 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 *TXD 8 18 *RXD
9 19 (+24V) 9 19
10 (+24V) 20 AMP 10 20
1–178128–3(Housing)
( ): Signals not used. 1–175218–5(Contact)

CP2 or CP3 1 200A 1 200A


CN2
(AMP) 2 200B 2 200B
3 G Only for 14”CRT 3 G

CP5 1 +24V In case of LCD 1 +24V CP5


(AMP) 2 0V 2 0V (AMP)
3 3
AMP
2–178288–3(Housing)
1–175218–5(Contact)
Ground

Be sure to connect the


protective ground.

Cable wiring
1 1
RXD TXD
2 2
0V 0V
3 3

4 4
0V 0V
5 5
*RXD *TXD
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
*TXD *RXD
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
TXD RXD
14 14
0V 0V

Grounding plate
Recommended cable material
A66L–0001–0371 Coaxial cable (Max. 50m)

169
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

14″ analog CRT or 9.5″


analog LCD display
14″CRT/MDI unit
interface CNC 9.5″LCD/MDI unit
(When MMC–IV is used)
JA1A (MMC–IV board) JN1
(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR-E20LMD)
HIROSE
1 VDR 11 FI40A–20S(connector) 1 VDR 11
2 0V 12 VSYNC FI–20–CV5(Case) 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 HSYNC 8 18 HSYNC
9 19 9 19
10 20 AMP 10 20
1–178128–3(Housing)
1–175218–5(Contact)

CP2 or CP3 1 200A 1 200A


CP11
(AMP) 2 200B 2 200B
3 G In case of 14″CRT 3 G

CP5 1 +24V 1 +24V CP5


(AMP) 2 0V 2 0V (AMP)
3 3
AMP
2–178288–3(Housing)
1–175218–5(Contact)
Ground

Be sure to connect the


protective ground.

Cable wiring
1 1
VDR VDR
2 2
0V 0V
3 3
VDG VDG
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
HSYNC HSYNC
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
VSYNC VSYNC
14 14
0V 0V

Grounding plate
Recommended cable material
A66L–0001–0371 Coaxisal cable (Max. 50m)

170
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Interface between Main


CPU board and MMC–IV
board (Video signal) Main CPU board MMC–IV board

JA1 JA1B
(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR-EV20MDT)
HIROSE
1 VDR 11 FI40A–20S(Connector) 1 VDR 11
2 0V 12 VSYNC FI–20–CV5(Case) 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 HSYNC 8 18 HSYNC
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20

Cable wiring
1 1
VDR VDR
2 2
0V 0V
3 3
VDG VDG
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
HSYNC HSYNC
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
VSYNC VSYNC
14 14
0V 0V

Grounding plate
Recommended cable material
A66L–0001–0371 Coaxial cable (Max. 40cm)

171
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

Interface between
MMC–IV board and
F–BUS VGA board MMC–IV board F–BUS VGA board
(Video signal)
JA1A JA1B
(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR-E20MDT)
HIROSE
1 VDR 11 FI40A–20S(Connector) 1 VDR 11
2 0V 12 VSYNC FI–20–CV5(Case) 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 HSYNC 8 18 HSYNC
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20

Cable wiring
1 1
VDR VDR
2 2
0V 0V
3 3
VDG VDG
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
VDB VDB
6 6
0V 0V
18 18
HSYNC HSYNC
16 16
0V 0V
12 12
VSYNC VSYNC
14 14
0V 0V

Grounding plate
Recommended cable material
A66L–0001–0371 Coaxial cable (Max. 40cm)

172
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.1.3 Fine adjustment of the video signal is supported to enable its use with
Adjusting the Flat color liquid crystal displays and plasma displays. This adjustment is
necessary to compensate for errors resulting from the combination of NC
Display devices and cables.
Adjustment of the video signal is necessary if you have replaced the
display unit, cable, or a hardware component of the display circuit in the
NC, either as part of regular field maintenance or to correct a failure.

Locations of switches
and jumper pins

SW2 SW1
TM1
SW1

Color liquid crystal display Plasma display (rear view)


(rear view)

Adjustment
 Eliminating flicker  Analog color liquid crystal display: Jumper pin TM1
Change the jumper pin to another side.
Normally one of these settings will eliminate flicker.
 Plasma display: Switch SW1
1 Change the jumper pin and search for a range such that flicker is
eliminated. .
2 If you find that flicker is eliminated by two or more different
settings, select the setting approximating to the midpoint of those
settings.
Example : If flicker is eliminated by all of settings 2 to 6, select 4.
 Adjusting the horizontal  Analog color liquid crystal display : Switch SW1
position  Plasma display : Switch SW2
1 The screen can be shifted horizontally in units of dots.
2 Adjust the horizontal position such that the entire screen is visible.
Only one setting can successfully realize this positioning.

Others Do not attempt to change any controls or settings other than those
described above.

173
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.1.4 The monochrome LCD is equipped with setting switch VRD1 which is
Contrast Adjustment used to adjust the screen contrast.
for Monochrome LCD

Location

VRD1

ÅÅ

CP5 JN1 JA2 JA1A

Monochrome LCD (rear)

Note
All other settings shall be left as is.

174
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.1.5 The keyboard interface specification is common to all MDI units.


Keyboard Interface
CNC, CRT, LCD unit MDI unit

JA2 CK1
(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR–E20MD)
1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01 1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01
2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03 2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03
3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05 3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05
4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07 4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07
5 *COM00 15 *COM01 5 *COM00 15 *COM01
6 *COM02 16 *COM03 6 *COM02 16 *COM03
7 *COM04 17 *COM05 7 *COM04 17 *COM05
8 *COM06 18 *COM07 8 *COM06 18 *COM07
9 *COM08 19 *COM09 9 *COM08 19 *COM09
10 *COM10 20 *COM11 10 *COM10 20 *COM11

Cable wiring

1 1
*KEY00 *KEY00
2 2
*KEY02 *KEY02
3 3
*KEY04 *KEY04
4 4
*KEY06 *KEY06
5 5
*COM00 *COM00
6 6
*COM02 *COM02
7 7
*COM04 *COM04
8 8
*COM06 *COM06
9 9
*COM08 *COM08
10 10
*COM10 *COM10
11 11
*KEY01 *KEY01
12 12
*KEY03 *KEY03
13 13
*KEY05 *KEY05
14 14
*KEY07 *KEY07
15 15
*COM01 *COM01
16 16
*COM03 *COM03
17 17
*COM05 *COM05
18 18
*COM07 *COM07
19 19
*COM09 *COM09
20 20
*COM11 *COM11
Shield

Grounding plate

Recommended cable material


A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 pair)

175
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.2
I/O DEVICE
INTERFACE
7.2.1
RS–232–C Serial Port
CNC Relay connector
(DBM–25S)
JD5A, JD5B
(PCR-EV20MDT) 1 FG
14
2 SD
1 RD 11 SD 15
3 RD
2 0V 12 0V 16
4 RS
3 DR 13 ER 17
5 CS
4 0V 14 0V 18
6 DR
5 CS 15 RS 19
7 SG
6 0V 16 0V 20 ER
8 CD
7 CD 17 21
9
8 0V 18 22
10
9 19 +24V 23
11
10 +24V 20 24
12
25 +24V
13

Cable wiring

1 3
RD RD
2
0V
3 6
DR DR
4
0V
5 5
CS CS
6
0V
7 8
CD CD
8
0V
9
10
+24V
11 2
SD SD
12
0V
13 20
ER ER
14
0V
15 4
RS RS
16 7
0V SG
17
18
19 25
24V +24V
20 1
*
Shield
GND

Grounding plate

Recommended cable material


A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10–pair)

176
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.2.2
PPR Connection
Relaying connector signal layout
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24

Relaying connector Cable side connector


Connector : DBM-25S Connector : DBM-25P
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC (JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : D20418-J2 Lock metal : DB–C2–J9
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC (JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.) INDUSTRY., LTD.)

CNC

JD5A, JD5B
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V PPR
3 DR 13 ER
4 0V 14 0V FG
5 CS 15 RS
Accessory
6 0V 16 0V Relaying for PPR
7 CD 17 cable
8 0V 18
9 19 +24V
10 +24V 20

Input power supply

85 to 125VAC
50/60Hz "3Hz, 0.2KVA

Notes
1. Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the
plug receptacle at the machine tool builder.
2. Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool
builder.
3. Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
4. When connecting the PPR, set the corresponding
parameter to use reader puncher interface (baud rate is
4800 baud).

177
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.2.3
Portable Tape Reader
Connection
Relaying connector signal layout
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24

Relaying connector Cable side connector


Connector : DBM-25S Connector : DBM-25P
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC (JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : D20418-J2 Lock metal : DB–C2–J9
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC (JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.) INDUSTRY., LTD.)

CNC

JD5A, JD5B
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V Portable
tape
3 DR 13 ER
reader
4 0V 14 0V FG
5 CS 15 RS Accessory
Relaying for portable
6 0V 16 0V
cable tape reader
7 CD 17
8 0V 18
9 19 +24V
10 +24V 20

Cable side plug


WF7013 (MATSUSHITA
Input power supply
ELECTRIC WORKS CO., LTD.)
200VAC (+10%, –15%)
50/60Hz"1Hz, 110VA (Without reel) Plug receptacle
50/60Hz"1Hz, 130VA (With reel) WF3012E (MATSUSHITA
ELECTRIC WORKS CO., LTD.)

Notes
1. Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the
plug receptacle at the machine tool builder.
2. Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool
builder.
3. Use the unified shielded cable for signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
4. When connecting the portable tape reader, set the
corresponding parameter to use reader puncher interface
(baud rate is 4800 baud).

178
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.2.4
FANUC FLOPPY Relaying connector signal layout
CASSETTE Connection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24

Cable side connector


Connector : DBM-25P
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : DDB–C2–J9
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC INDUSTRY., LTD.)

Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
CNC Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION
JD5A, JD5B ELECTRONIC
Relaying
(PCR-EV20MDT) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
cable
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V FANUC
FLOPPY
3 DR 13 ER
CASSETTE
4 0V 14 0V FG
5 CS 15 RS
6 0V 16 0V
Accessory
7 CD 17 for FLOPPY
8 0V 18 CASSETTE
9 19 +24V
10 +24V 20

Notes
1. Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay
cable.
2. Use a unified shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
3. Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4. Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface
when connecting FANUC cassette.
The baud rate is 4800 baud.
5. Connect the FANUC cassette to either JD5A or JD5B.
Do not use both pins; the power capacity may exceed that
of +24V and blow the fuse.

179
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.2.5
Connection of Tape
Reader without Reels
CNC TApe reader

JD5A, JD5B DB-25S-T


(JAPAN AVIATION
(PCR-EV20MDT) ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)

1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4
Connector : 17
5 CS 15 RS DB-25P 5
18
6 0V 16 0V Lock metal 6 DR
D110278 19
7 CD 17 7 SG
(JAPAN AVIATION 20
8 0V 18 ELECTRONIC 8
21
9 19 +24V INDUSTRY., LTD.) 9
22
10 +24V 20 10
23
11 RDY
24
12
25
AMP 13
1-178128-3
CP2, CP3 M3 screw terminal
1 2 3 200A 200B G
R S G 200A 200B G

Cable wiring

Control unit Tape reader

(3)
SD RD
(2)
RD SD
(6)
ER DR
RS
CS
(11)
DR RDY
CD
(7)
SG SG
(0V) FG
(1)

FG
Use cable clamp

Notes
1. Note that the lines with the same signal names on the
control unit and the tape reader cannot be connected.
2. Use a unified shield cable for signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041

180
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.2.6
Connection of Tape
Reader with Reels
CNC Tape reader

JD5A, JD5B
(PCR-EV20MDT) CD8 (MR–20RM)
1 RD 11 SD 1 11
2 0V 12 0V 2 12
3 DR 13 ER 3 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 14
5 CS 15 RS 5 ER 15
6 0V 16 0V MR–20LFH 6 16
7 CD 17 7 17 SG
8 0V 18 8 RD 18 DR
9 19 +24V 9 SD 19 CS
10 +24V 20 10 20 RS

AMP JAPAN, LTD.


1-178128-3
  CP41
1 2 3 1 2 3
R S G R S G

BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.


SMS3PK–5

Cable wiring

Control unit Tape reader


CD8
(9)
SD RD
(8)
RD SD
(19)
CS CS
(20)
RS RS
(18)
DR DR
CD
(5)
ER ER
(17)
SG SG
(0V) FG

Use cable clamp.

Notes
1. Note that the lines with the same signal names on the
control unit and the tape reader cannot be connected.
2. Use a unified shield cable for signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041

181
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.3
MANUAL PULSE
CNC MPG
GENERATOR
JA3
INTERFACE (PCR-EV20MDT) MPG unit #1
(M3 screw terminal)
1 HA1 11
2 HB1 12 0V 1 2 3 4

3 HA2 13 +5V 0V HA1 HB1

4 HB2 14 0V
MPG unit #2
5 HA3 15
(M3 screw terminal)
6 HB3 16 0V
7 17 1 2 3 4

8 18 +5V +5V 0V HA2 HB2

9 +5V 19 MPG unit #3


10 20 +5V (M3 screw terminal)
1 2 3 4
+5V 0V HA3 HB3

Cable wiring

1 5
HA1 HA1
2 6
HB1 HB1
9 3
+5V +5V
12 4
0V 0V

3 5
HA2 HA2
4 6
HB2 HB2
8 3
+5V +5V
14 4
0V 0V

5 5
HA3 HA3
6 6
HB3 HB3
20 3
+5V +5V
16 4
0V 0V

Shield
Grounding plate

Recommended cable material


A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3–pair) for Lx20m

182
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Cable connection for the The power supply to the manual pulse generator is 5 VDC, same as for
Manual Pulse Generator the pulse coder. It is therefore necessary to prevent cable resistance from
causing the supply voltage to drop more than 0.2 V (total for both the 0
V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.2 y 0.1 R
m
2L

0.1 : 0.1 A power supply current of the manual pulse generator


R : Resistance per unit length of the wire (Ω/m)
m : Number of wires connected in each 0 V and 5 V line
L : Wire length (m)
This can be converted to the following equation:
Lxm
R

When A66L-0001-0286 cable is used:


This cable, developed for the FS16 pulse coder interface, consists of three
pairs of signal wires and six power line wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 Ω/m).
When three wires of this cable are used for 0 V and another three for 5 V,
the allowable cable length is calculated as follows:
Lx 3 + 76.75[m]
0.0394
This means that a power supply with a cable length of 50 m is still within
specifications.

183
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.3.1
Signal Specifications
for Manual Pulse
Generator
 Electrical characteristics
Parameter Symbol Standard Units Test conditions

Min. Max.

Output V OH V CC –0.2 V RL = R 
voltage
4.4 V RL = 4 k

V OL 0.3 V RL = 200 

Timing conditions Recommended circuit

T1 T2 T3 T4 VCC

300 

HA1
to CNC OUTPUT

HA2

T1, T2, T3, T4 > 50s


Period > 200 s 0V

 Signal logics

[Forward movement command] [Backward movement command]

HA1 HA1

HB1 HB1

[The following two cases are not assumed as command pulses.]

HA1 HA1

HB1 HB1

184
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.4
REMOTE BUFFER
CNC OPTION–1 board Host computer (example)
INTERFACE
JD5C
(RS–232–C) (PCR-EV20MDT) DBM–25S
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
17
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
18
6 0V 16 0V 6 DR
19
7 CD 17 7 SG
20 ER
8 0V 18 8 CD
21
9 19 (+24V) 9
22
10 (+24V) 20 10
23
11
24
12
25
13

Conceptional diagram of signal connection

CNC side Host side


Output SD SD

Input RD RD

RS RS
CS CS
ER ER

DR DR
CD CD
SG SG

0V FG FG
FRAME

185
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

Cable wiring

1 2
RD SD
2
0V
3 20
DR ER
4
0V
5 4
CS RS
6
0V
7 8
CD CD
8
0V
9
10
+24V
11 3
SD RD
12
0V
13 6
ER DR
14
0V
15 5
RS CS
16 7
0V SG
17
18
19 1
+24V FG
20 Shield
Grounding plate

Connect CS to RS if CS is not used. However, when protocol A or


expanded protocol A is used, connect as shown above because CS is used
for busy control. Connect DR to ER when DR is not used. Be sure to
connect CD to ER.

186
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.5
REMOTE BUFFER
CNC OPTION–1 board Host computer (Example)
INTERFACE (RS–422)
JD6A
1 FG
(PCR-EV20MDT) 20
2
21
1 RD 11 SD 3
22 *SD
2 *RD 12 *SD 4 SD
23
3 RT 13 TT 5
24 *RD
4 *RT 14 *TT 6 RD
25 *RS
5 CS 15 RS 7 RS
26 *RT
6 *CS 16 *RS 8 RT
27 *CS
7 DM 17 TR 9 CS
28
8 0V 18 *TR 10
29 *DM
9 *DM 19 (+24V) 11 DM
30 *TR
10 (+24V) 20 12 TR
31
13
32
(+24V) is not used. 14
33
15
34
16
35 *TT
17 TT
36
18
37
19 SG

Conceptional diagram of The figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and a host
signal connection computer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differential signal
transmission, two wires of signal lines are used for those signals.

Conceptional diagram of signal connection

CNC side Host side


Output SD SD

Input RD RD

RS RS
CS CS
TR TR

DM DM
TT TT

RT RT
SG SG

0V FG FG
FRAME

187
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

Actual example of
RS–422 signal wiring
Cable wiring

1 4
RD SD
2 22
*RD *SD
3 17
RT TT
4 35
*RT *TT
5 7
CS RS
6 25
*CS *RS
7 12
DM TR
9 30
*DM *TR
8 19
0V SG
10
+24V
11 6
SD RD
12 24
*SD *RD
13 8
TT RT
14 26
*TT *RT
15 9
RS CS
16 27
*RS *CS
17 11
TR DM
18 29
*TR *DM
19 1
+24V FG
20 Shield
Grounding plate FRAME

Notes
1. Be sure to use twisted pair cable.
2. Note that the pin position of the *DM signal on the CNC side
is positioned irregularly relative to the other signals. This is
to reduce the risk of damage to the circuit when this
connector is erroneously connected to the connector on the
other side.

188
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.6
DNC1 INTERFACE

7.6.1
Multi–points
CNC OPTION–1 board
Connection Tap
JD6A
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1 TRD1 (+) 11 TRD2 (+) 1 TRD2(+) 14
8
2 TRD1 (–) 12 TRD2 (–) 2 TRD2(–) 15
9
3 13 3 16
10 TRD1(+)
4 14 4 17
11 TRD1(–)
5 15 5 18
12
6 16 6 19
13
7 17 7 SG 20
8 SG 18
9 19
10 20

Cable wiring

1 10
TRD1 (+) TRD1 (+)
2 11
TRD1 (–) TRD1 (–)
11 1
TRD2 (+) TRD2 (+)
12 2
TRD2 (–) TRD2 (–)
8 7
SG SG

PCR connector MR connector


(MR20 Female)

189
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.6.2
1 to 1 Connection
CNC OPTION–1 board Tap
JD6A
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1 RD 11 SD 1 SD 14 CS
8 TT
2 *RD 12 *SD 2 *SD 15 *CS
9 *TT
3 RT 13 TT 3 TR 16
10 RD
4 *RT 14 *TT 4 *TR 17
11 *RD
5 CS 15 RS 5 RS 18 RT
12 DM
6 *CS 16 *RS 6 *RS 19 *RT
13 *DM
7 DM 17 TR 7 SG 20
8 SG 18 *TR
9 *DM 19
10 20

Cable wiring

11 1
SD SD
12 2
*SD *SD
1 10
RD RD
2 11
*RD *RD
13 8
TT TT
14 9
*TT *TT
3 18
RT RT
4 19
*RT *RT
15 5
RS RS
16 6
*RS *RS
5 14
CS CS
6 15
*CS *CS
7 12
DM DM
9 13
*DM *DM
17 3
TR TR
18 4
*TR *TR
8 7
SG SG

Twisted pair cable HONDA TSUSHIN KO-


GYO CO., LTD.
Recommended cable materialy0.3mm2 MR20 (Female)

190
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.7
DNC2 INTERFACE
CNC OPTION–1 board Host computer (Example)
(RS–232–C)
JD5C
(PCR-EV20MDT) DBM–25S
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
14
2 0V 12 0V 2 SD
15
3 DR 13 ER 3 RD
16
4 0V 14 0V 4 RS
17
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS
18
6 0V 16 0V 6 DR
19
7 CD 17 7 SG
20 ER
8 0V 18 8 CD
21
9 19 (+24V) 9
22
10 (+24V) 20 10
23
11
24
12
25
13

Conceptional diagram of signal connection

CNC side Host side


output SD SD
Input RD RD

RS RS
CS CS
ER ER

DR DR
CD CD
SG SG

0V FG FG

FRAME

When not using CS, connect it to RS.


When not using DR, connect it to ER. Always connect CD to ER.

Note
If the host computer is an IBM PC–AT, connect its CS with
its ER because RS on the CNC goes low when the CNC
enters the reception phase.

191
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.8 Connection for the high speed skip signal is as follows.


HIGH SPEED DI
CNC OPTION–2 board or I/O card.
SIGNAL INTERFACE
JA5
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1 HDI0 11 HDI1
2 0V 12 0V
3 HDI2 13 HDI3
4 0V 14 0V
5 HDI4 15 HDI5
6 0V 16 0V
7 HDI6 17 HDI7
8 0V 18 0V
9 19
10 20

Cable wiring

1
HDI0
2
0V
11
HDI1
12
0V
3
HDI2
4
0V
13
HDI3
14
0V
5
HDI4
6
0V
15
HDI5
16
0V
7
HDI6
8
0V
17
HDI7
18
0V

Shield
Grounding plate

192
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.8.1
Receiver input signal (1) Circuit configuration
specifications for
high–speed DI signals
NC
Driver Receiver

VH/VL

lih/lil

Shield

(2) Absolute maximum rating


Input voltage range: Vin = –3.6 V to +13.6 V

(3) Input characteristics


Parameter Symbol Standard Units Remarks

Input high voltage VH 3.6 to 11.6 V

Input low voltage VL 0 to 1.0 V

Input high current Iih 0.5 max. mA Vin = 5 V

9.3 max. mA Vin = 10V

Input low current Iil –8.0 max. mA Vin = 0V

Notes
1. A positive Iih/Iil indicates that current is flowing into the
receiver, while a negative Iih/Iil indicates that current is
flowing out of the receiver.
2. A high–speed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when the input
voltage is low and 0 when the input voltage is high.

193
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.9 The following three configurations of the spindle interface are available.
SPINDLE INTERFACE
α Series Spindle
Amplifier
α series Spindle Amplifier
Position coder

SPDL-1(JA7A) JA7B JY2


JA7A SPM
Main CPU TB2 Motor
board
Metal cable Spindle motor
Position coder

JA7A JY2
SPM
TB2 Motor
Spindle motor

α Series Spindle
Amplifier + Rotation Tool
α series Spindle Amplifier + Rotation Tool
Position coder

SPDL-1(JA7A) JA7B JY2


JA7A SPM
TB2 Motor
Main CPU
board Metal cable Spindle motor #1
Position coder

JA7A JY2
SPM
TB2 Motor
Spindle motor #2

Rotation tool

SPDL–1 (JA7A) Inverter Motor

Analog spindle
SPDL-1(JA7A)
A-OUT1(JA8A) Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase) 
Main CPU
board
Analog spindle
Motor
Analog signal amplifier
Spindle

The position coder feedback signal is connected to connector JA7A used


for connection of the serial spindle described in (1) and (2) above.

194
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.9.1 Connect to the spindle amplifier, using optical fiber cable equipped with
Serial Spindle Interface an optical I/O link adaptor.

Spindle
CNC Optical I/O Link adapter amplifier

JA7A (Main CPU board) JD1


(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR-EV20MDT)
1 SIN 11 0V 1 *SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 SIN 12 0V
COP1
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 *SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V Up 4 SOUT 14 0V
CN11A
5 15 0V to 5 15 0V
2m
6 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 +5V 8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V 10 20 +5V

Optical fiber cable

See Section 6.2.2 for adaptor specifications.

Cable wiring

JA7A JD1
1 4
SIN SOUT
*SIN 2 3 *SOUT
3 2
SOUT SIN
*SOUT 4 1 *SIN
9 9
+5V +5V
+5V 18 18 +5V
20 20
+5V +5V
11 11
0V 0V
0V 12 12
0V
13 13
0V 0V
0V 14 14
0V
15 15
0V 0V
0V 16 16
0V

Shield
Grounding plate

Recommended cable material


A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG10–pair)

195
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.9.2
Analog Spindle
CNC
Interface
JA8A (Main board) Signal name Description
JA8B (OP–2 board)
(PCR–EV20MDT) SVC, ES Spindle command voltage and
common line
1 0V 11 0V
2 CLKX0 12 CLKX1 ENB1, ENB2 Spindle enable signal (Note 1)
3 0V 13 0V CLKX0, CLKX1,
Feed axis check signal (Note 2)
4 FSX0 14 FSX1 FSX0, FSX1,
DX0, DX1,
5 ES 15 0V "15V, +5V, 0V
6 DX0 16 DX1
7 SVC 17 –15V
8 ENB1 18 +5V
9 ENB2 19 +15V
10 +15V 20 +5V

Cable wiring
FANUC SPINDLE
SERVO UNIT

SVC 7 DA2
ES 5 E
ENB1 8
ENB2 9 Shield
Ground plate

Notes
1. ENB1 and 2 turn on when a spindle command voltage is
effective. These signals are not used when the FANUC
Spindle Servo Unit is used.
The voltage must not exceed 30 V when a signal is off.
The current must not exceed 200 mA when a signal is on.
2. Feed axis check signal is used when a feed axis is checked
or service work is done. This signal is not used for spindle
control.

196
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.9.3
α Series Spindle
CNC α series Spindle Amplifier Module
Amplifier Interface
JA7A (Main CPU board) JA7B
(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 SIN 11 0V 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V Up 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 15 0V to 5 15 0V
2m
6 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)

Cable connection

Cable connectionl CNC α series Spindle Amplifier Module


JA7A JA7B
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
0V 0V
16 16 0V
0V

Shield
Grounding plate

197
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

Notes
1. Recommended cable specification:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG x 10 pairs)
2. When this cable is routed near other cables, such as power
cables, connect the shield line to the grounding plate. This
connection is not, however, necessary when the CNC and
spindle amplifier module are mounted in close proximity.
3. This cable can be used to connect the CNC and spindle
amplifier module electrically, when the CNC and spindle
amplifier module are mounted in the same power magnetics
cabinet or in power magnetics cabinets which have been
connected by welding or other means. When mounted in
separate power magnetics cabinets, the CNC and spindle
amplifier module must be connected by an optical cable, via
an optical I/O link adapter.
4. The +5V terminal is used for optical link transmission via an
optical I/O link adapter. When using this cable or other
metallic cables, leave the +5V terminal open. If +5 V is
supplied to this terminal when a metallic cable is used, +5
V for the NC unit and that for the spindle module are
short–circuited.

198
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.9.4
Position Coder
Interface CNC (Main CPU)

JA7A(Main board) Name Description


JA7B (OP–2 board) SC, *SC Position coder C–phase
signal
1 SC 11
2 *SC 12 0V PA, *PA Position coder A–phase
signal
3 SOUT 13
4 *SOUT 14 0V PB, *PB Position coder B–phase
PA signal
5 15
6 *PA 16 0V SOUT, Signals for serial spindle
*SOUT (Note 1)
7 PB 17
8 *PB 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V

Cable wiring
POSITION CODER
CNC
5
PA A(PA)
6
*PA N(*PA)
7
PB C(PB)
8
*PB R(*PB)
1
SC B(PZ)
2
*SC P(*PZ)
9,18,20
+5V H
12,14,16
0V K
3
SOUT SHIELD
4
*SOUT
EARTH PLATE

Recommended cable material


A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG+6×#24AWG×3) MAX LENGTH 20m.

Note
Signals SOUT and *POUT are for a serial spindle. These
signals are not used for an analog spindle.
This means that if the position coder feedback function is
employed in the analog spindle, no serial spindle can be
connected.

199
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.10
SERVO INTERFACE

7.10.1 The servo interface has these features.


Outline
D Digital control AC servo motor
D Motor feedback : Serial pulse coder
- 40,000 pulse/rev incremental pulse coder
- 1,000,000 pulse/rev absolute pulse coder
D Scale feedback : A/B/Z signal interface

Series 16/18/160/180 Separate type


discharge unit

Main CPU board * *


or
T2 T4 *
Option–2 board 200VAC
α series servo
module *
T1 100VAC
JSnA JSnB *

JFn

MS3106B22-14S *

+6V battery unit for


JA4A, JA4B absolute pulse coder

Linear scale

JF2n

n=Axis number

200
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.10.2
Servo Amplifier
Interface ( series
servo amplifier)
CNC Servo amplifier
JS1A–2 to JS6A–2 (Option2) JS1B–JS3B
(PCR-EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)

1 IRn 11 ISn 1 IRn 11 ISn


2 GDRn 12 GDSn 2 GDRn 12 GDSn
3 *PWMAn 13 *ENBLn 3 *PWMAn 13 *ENBLn
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 *PWMCn 15 PD1 5 *PWMCn 15 PD1
6 0V 16 *PD1 6 0V 16 *PD1
7 *PWMEn 17 PRQ1 7 *PWMEn 17 PRQ1
8 0V 18 *PRQ1 8 0V 18 *PRQ1
9 *DRDYn 19 0V 9 *DRDYn 19 0V
10 *MCONn 20 0V 10 *MCONn 20 0V

n : Axis number (1 to 8)

Cable wiring

1 1
IRn IRn
2 2
GDRn GDRn
3 3
*PWMAn *PWMAn
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
*PWMCn *PWMCn
6 6
0V 0V
7 7
*PWMEn *PWMEn
8 8
0V 0V
9 9
*DRDYn *DRDYn
10 10
*MCONn *MCONn
11 11
ISn ISn
12 12
GDSn GDSn
13 13
*ENBLn *ENBLn
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
PDn PDn
16 16
*PDn *PDn
17 17
PRQn PRQn
18 18
*PRQn *PRQn
19 19
0V 0V
20 20
0V OV

Shield
Grounding plate

Recommended cable material


A66L-0001-0284#10P (#28AWG10–pair)
Since IRn and ISn are likely to be reflected by noise,
use pair line at inside

201
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.10.3
Serial Pulse Coder
Interface

Serial α pulse coder


Interface
a1/3000
α series servo amplifier Servo motor
a2/2000
a3/3000 JF1XJF3 Pulse coder
(PCR-EV20MDT) Connector : HDAB–15S
Connector cover : HDAW–15–CV
1 SD 11
1 0V
2 *SD 12 0V 9
2
3 13 10
3 0V
4 14 0V 11
4 SHLD
5 REQ 15 12 SD
5 REQ
6 *REQ 16 0V 13 *SD
6 *REQ
7 +6VA 17 14 +6VA
7
8 18 +5V 15 +5V
8 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V

Cable wiring

JFn Pulse coder


1 12
SD SD
2 13
*SD *SD
5 5
REQ REQ
6 6
*REQ *REQ
7 14
+6VA +6VA
6

9
+5V
18 8
+5V +5V
20 15
+5V +5V
12 1
0V 0V
14 2
0V 0V
16 3
0V 0V
4
SHLD

Grounding plate

Notes
1. +6A need not be connected when incremnetal pulse coder
is used.
2. Recommended cable material: A66L–0001–0286

202
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Serial α pulse coder


Interface
α series servo amplifier Servo motor
α3/3000 to α40/2000,
αC3/2000 to αC22/1500 JF1XJF3 Pulse coder
(PCR-EV20MDT) Connector : MS3106B20–29SW(straight)
: MS3108B20–29SW(Elbow)
1 SD 11
A SD B C D *SD
2 *SD 12 0V
E F REQ G *REQ H SHLD
3 13
J +5V K +5V L M
4 14 0V
N 0V P R +6VA S
5 REQ 15
T 0V
6 *REQ 16 0V
7 +6VA 17
8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V

Cable connection

JFn Pulse coder


1 A
SD SD
2 D
*SD *SD
5 F
REQ REQ
6 G
*REQ *REQ
7 R
+6VA +6VA
6

9
+5V
18 J
+5V +5V
20 K
+5V +5V
12
0V
14 N
0V 0V
16 T
0V 0V
H
SHLD
Shield
Grounding plate

Notes
1. +6A need not be connected when incremnetal pulse coder
is used.
2. Recommended cable material: A66L–0001–0286

203
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

Cable connection for the This CNC employs a serial pulse coder for which the power supply is 5
incremental pulse coder VDC, same as used by the conventional pulse coder. It is therefore
necessary to prevent cable resistance from causing the supply voltage to
drop more than 0.2 V (total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines).
0.2 y 0.35 m
R 2L 0.35 : 0.35 A power supply current of the
incremental pulse coder
This can be converted to the R : Resistance per unit length of the wire
following equation: m : Number of wires connected in each
0 V and 5 V line
Lx m L : Wire length (m)
3.5R

When A66L–0001–0286 This cable, developed for the pulse coder interface, consists of three pairs
cable is used of signal wires and six power line wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 Ω/m). When
this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as follows:
Lx 3 + 21.75[m]
3.5 0.0394
This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with the Series
16 and 18 connector. However it cannot be extended up to 50 m.

When A66L–0001–0157 This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B-61393E) for
cable is used Series 0, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
(50/0.18, 0.016 Ω/m).
When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as
follows:
Lx 3 + 53.57[m]
3.5 0.016
This cable can be extended up to 50 m from an electrical point of view.
However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securely into
the cable clamp.
It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal block
or peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce the
diameter so that it fits into the connector.
For example, MR connector manufactured by
Example 1) Honda Communications
Pulse coder
A66L-0001-0157
NC

A66L-0001-0286 Terminal
Example2) block
Pulse coder
A66L-0001-0157
NC

Enlarged figure

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with a heat shrinkable tube

204
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Cable connection for the Series 16/18 employ the serial pulse coder, for which the power supply
absolute pulse coder 5 VDC, same as for the conventional pulse coder. It is therefore necessary
to prevent cable resistance from causing the supply voltage to drop by less
than 0.25 V (total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.25 y 0.40 m
R 2L 0.40 : 0.40 A power supply current of the
incremental pulse coder
This can be converted to R : Resistance per unit length of the
the following equation: wire [Ω/m]
m : Number of wires connected in each
Lx m 0 V and 5 V line
3.2R
L : Wire length (m)

When A66L–0001–0286 This cable, developed for the pulse coder interface, consists of three pairs
cable is used of signal wires and six power line wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 Ω/m). When
this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as follows:
Lx 3 + 23.79[m]
3.2 0.0394
This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with the
connector of this control but cannot be extended up to 50 m.

When A66L–0001–0157 This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B-61393E) for
cable is used Series 0–C, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
(50/0.18, 0.016 Ω/m).
When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as
follows:
Lx 3 + 58.59[m]
3.2 0.016
This cable can be extended up to 50 m from an electrical point of view.
However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securely into
the cable clamp.
It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal block
or peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce the
diameter so that it fits into the connector.

For example, MR connector manufactured


Example 1) by Honda Communications
Pulse coder
A66L-0001-0157
NC

A66L-0001-0286 Terminal
Example2) block
Pulse coder
A66L-0001-0157
NC

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Enlarged figure

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with a heat shrinkable tube

205
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.10.4
Separate Type Detector
Interface
Linear scale interface
CNC
Linear scale
JF21 to JF24
JF21–2 to JF24–2
(PCR-EV20MDT)

1 PCA 11
2 *PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13
4 *PCB 14 0V
5 PCZ 15
6 *PCZ 16 0V
7 (+6V) 17
+6V and REQ are for separate
absolute pulse coders.
8 (REQ) 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V

Cable wiring

1
PCA PCA
2
*PCA *PCA
3
PCB PCB
4
*PCB *PCB
5
PCZ PCZ
6
*PCZ *PCZ
9
+5V +5V
18
+5V +5V
20
+5V +5V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16
0V 0V

Shield
Grounding plate

Recommended cable material


A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG6 + #24AWG3–pair)

Note
Main CPU board and Option 2 board of Series 16 and Main
CPU board of Series 18 can control up to max. 6 axes per
board, but linear scale interface is available up to 4 axes (1
to 4 axes). Liner scale cannot be provided with 5th and 6th
axes.

206
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Separate type pulse


coder interface

For absolute detector


CNC
JF21 to JF24, JF21–2 to JF24–2 Separate type detector
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Pulse coder
1 PCA 11
(MS3102A–22–14P)
2 *PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13 A PCA B *PCA C PCB D *PCB
4 *PCB 14 0V E PCZ F *PCZ G H
5 PCZ 15 J K L +5V M 0V
6 *PCZ 16 0V N SHLD P R S REQ
7 +6V 17 T +6VA U 0VA V
8 REQ 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
MS3106B22–14S

Cable wiring

1 A
PCA PCA
2 B
*PCA *PCA
3 C
PCB PCB
4 D
*PCB *PCB
5 E
PCZ PCZ
6 F
*PCZ *PCZ
7 T
+6V +6VA
8 S
REQ REQ
9
+5V
18
+5V
20 L
+5V +5V
12 M
0V 0V
14
0V
16 U
0V 0VA
N
SHLD
Shield (Shield)
Grounding plate
Recommended cable material
A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG6 + #24AWG3–pair)

Note
Main CPU board and Option 2 board of Series 16 and Main
CPU board of Series 18 can control up to max. 6 axes per
board, but linear scale interface is available up to 4 axes (1
to 4 axes). Liner scale cannot be provided with 5th and 6th
axes.

207
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

For incremental detector


CNC Separate type detector
JF21 to JF24
JF21–2 to JF24–2 Pulse coder
(PCR-EV20MDT)
(MS3102A–20–29P)
1 PCA 11
2 *PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13 A PCA B PCB C +5V D *PCA
4 *PCB 14 0V E *PCB F PCZ G *PCZ H SHLD
5 PCZ 15 J +5V K +5V L M
6 *PCZ 16 0V N 0V P 0V R S
7 +6V 17 T 0V
8 REQ 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V MS3106B20–29SW

Cable wiring

1 A
PCA PCA
2 D
*PCA *PCA
3 B
PCB PCB
4 E
*PCB *PCB
5 F
PCZ PCZ
6 G
*PCZ *PCZ

9 C
+5V +5V
18 J
+5V +5V
20 K
+5V +5V
12 N
0V 0V
14 P
0V 0V
16 T
0V 0V
H
SHLD
(Shield)
Shield
Grounding plate
Recommended cable material
A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG6 + #24AWG3–pair)

Note
Main CPU board and Option 2 board of Series 16 and Main
CPU board of Series 18 can control up to max. 6 axes per
board, but linear scale interface is available up to 4 axes (1
to 4 axes). Liner scale cannot be provided with 5th and 6th
axes.

208
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

Input signal The standard of the feedback signal from the additional detector is as
requirements shown below.
(1) A and B phase signal input
This is a method to input position information by the mutual 90 degree
phase slip of A and B phase signals.
Detection of the position is performed with the state in which the B phase
is leading taken as a shift in the plus direction, and the state in which the
A phase is leading as a shift in the minus direction.

A phase signal
Shift in plus direction
B phase signal

A phase signal
Shift in minus direction
B phase signal

(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat frequency

A
PCA/*PCA
0.5V
*PCA/PCA
B
PCB/*PCB
0.5V
*PCB/PCB

Td Td Td Td
Tp

(3) Z phase signal input


For the Z phase signal (1 rotation signal), a signal width of more than 1
frequency of the A phase or B phase signals is necessary.

Z phase signal
Tw

Twy 1 frequency of A phase or B phase

209
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

Time requirements Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF21
to JF28

TD y 0.15 µsec

The signals for these connectors are differential input signals with A and
B phases. An important factor is time TD from point A, when the
potential difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B,
when the potential difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lower
than 0.5V. The minimum value of TD is 0.15 µs. The period and pulse
width of the signals must be long enough to satisfy the above
requirements.

Receiver circuit
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS, INC.: SN75115
PCA The same circuit is used
A–phase for B–phase signals
signal 110Ω
(PCB and *PCB) and
*PCA one–rotation signals
(PCZ and *PCZ).
560Ω

5V

210
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.10.5
APC Battery Interface
CNC Battery box
JA4 (M3 terminal)
(PCR-EV20MDT)
+ –
1 11
+6V 0V
2 12
3 0V 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 +6V 17
8 18
9 19
10 20

Cable wiring

JA4 Battery case

7 +
+6V +6V
3 –
0V 0V

Recommended cable material y 0.2mm2 (7/0.18)

Note
This absolute battery is exclusively used for a scale. Install
a battery of pulse coder of a motor on the  series amplifier
side.

211
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–62753EN/01

7.11
ANALOG SIGNAL
INTERFACE CNC OPTION 2 board

JA6
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1 AIN0 11 AIN1
2 0V 12 0V
3 AIN2 13 AIN3
4 0V 14 0V
5 AOUT 15
6 0V 16 0V
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20

Cable wiring

1
AIN0
Analog input CH0 2
0V
11
AIN1
Analog input CH1 12
0V
3
AIN2
Analog input CH2 4
0V
13
AIN3
Analog input CH3 14
0V
5
AOUT
Analog output
0V
Shield
Grounding plate

Receiver circuit
CNC
5V

18kΩ
36kΩ AIN0 to 3
Input voltage range –10V to +10V
36kΩ
Input current range –0.5mA to +0.5mA

0V 0V 0V

100kΩ AOUT
Output voltage range –10V to +10V

0V 0V

212
B–62753EN/01 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.12
HIGH–SPEED SERIAL
HSSB interface board
BUS (HSSB) (CNC side) Intelligent terminal

INTERFACE Optical fiber cable

COP7 COP7

1) Recommended cables (optical fiber)


A66L–6001–0021#L5R003: 5 m
A66L–6001–0021#L20R03: 20 m
A66L–6001–0022#L50R03: 50 m

213
APPENDIX
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

A   
      

Number
Classification Name of
Figure
Control unit 2–SLOT CONTROL UNIT Fig. 1
3–SLOT CONTROL UNIT Fig. 2
4–SLOT CONTROL UNIT Fig. 3
6–SLOT CONTROL UNIT Fig. 4
8–SLOT CONTROL UNIT Fig. 5
Unit for display 9″CRT/MDI UNIT (SMALL TYPE, MONOCHROME) Fig. 6
and data input
9″CRT/MDI (SMALL TYPE, COLOR) Fig. 7
9″CRT/MDI (STANDARD, MONOCHROME) Fig. 8
9″CRT/MDI (STANDARD, COLOR) Fig. 9
14″CRT/MDI UNIT (HORIZONTAL) Fig. 10
14″CRT/MDI UNIT (VERTICAL) Fig. 11
SEPARATE TYPE 9″ CRT UNIT (MONOCHROME) Fig. 12
SEPARATE TYPE 9″ CRT UNIT (COLOR) Fig. 13
SEPARATE TYPE MDI UNIT (SMALL TYPE) Fig. 14
SEPARATE TYPE MDI UNIT (STANDARD) Fig. 15
SEPARATE TYPE 9″ PDP UNIT Fig. 16
PDP/MDI UNIT Fig. 17
SEPARATE TYPE 7.2″ LCD UNIT Fig. 18
SEPARATE TYPE 8.4″LCD UNIT Fig. 19
8.4″LCD/MDI UNIT (Small) Fig. 20
8.4″LCD/MDI UNIT (Standard) Fig. 21
9.5″LCD/MDI UNIT (HORIZONTAL) Fig. 22
9.5″LCD/MDI UNIT (VERTICAL) Fig. 23
SEPARATE TYPE 9.5″ LCD UNIT (MONOCHROME) Fig. 24
SEPARATE TYPE MDI UNIT (for 9.5″ LCD, HORIZONTAL) Fig. 25
SEPARATE TYPE MDI UNIT (for 9.5″ LCD, VERTICAL) Fig. 26

217
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Number
Classification Name of
Figure
External device POSITION CODER Fig. 27
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR Fig. 28
PENDANT TYPE MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR Fig. 29
BATTERY CASE FOR SEPARATE TYPE ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER Fig. 30
PUNCH PANEL (WIDE WIDTH TYPE) Fig. 31
PUNCH PANEL (NARROW WIDTH TYPE) Fig. 32
PORTABLE TAPE READER WITHOUT REELS Fig. 33
PORTABLE TAPE READER WITH REELS Fig. 34
TAPE READER WITHOUT REELS (SERIAL INTERFACE) Fig. 35
TAPE READER WITH REELS Fig. 36
Control CONTROL TRANSFORMER Fig. 37
transformer
CONTROL TRANSFORMER Fig. 38

218
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 1 2–SLOT CONTROL UNIT

172

10

112 S=1/1
56 56
380
360

7
S=1/1

Weight : 1.3kg

219
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 2 3–SLOT CONTROL UNIT

Weight : 2.3kg

220
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 3 4–SLOT CONTROL UNIT

Weight : 2.5kg

221
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 4 6–SLOT CONTROL UNIT

Weight : 3.8kg

222
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 5 8–SLOT CONTROL UNIT

Weight : 5.0kg

223
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 6 9″ CRT/MDI UNIT (SMALL TYPE, MONOCHROME)

Specification : A02B–0120–C041

130 130 130


8–M3

184
190
384

Panel cut drawing

8–ø4 400 2
5 130 130 130 5 22 220
5
190
200
5

Weight : 4.1kg

224
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 7 9″ CRT/MDI UNIT (SMALL TYPE, COLOR)

Specification : A02B–0120–C042#

Panel cut drawing

Unit support
(for reference)

An appropriate support for the


CRT/unit should be provided.

Weight : 8.5kg

225
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 8 9″ CRT/MDI UNIT (STANDARD, MONOCHROME)

Specification : A02B–0120–C051#

Panel cut drawing

Weight : 5.5kg

226
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 9 9″ CRT/MDI UNIT (STANDARD, COLOR)

Specification : A02B–0120–C052#

Panel cut drawing

Unit support
(for reference)

An appropriate support for the


CRT/unit should be provided.

Weight : 9.5kg

227
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 10–1 14″ CRT/MDI UNIT (HORIZONTAL)

Specification : A02B–0222–C071#

10–M4 168 170 168


178
344

178

494

An appropriate support for the


CRT/unit should be provided.
Ventilation opening

Unit support
(for reference)

228
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 10–2 14″ CRT/MDI UNIT (HORIZONTAL)

Specification : A02B–0200–C071#

15

37 334
140
2.6

10–φ4.8 2
520 2.2
7 168 170 168 7 372
7
178
370
178
7

10–M4 168 170 168


178
190

178

384

An appropriate support for the Panel cut drawing


CRT/unit should be provided.
Ventilation opening

Unit support Weight : 21kg


(for reference)

229
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 11–1 14″ CRT/MDI UNIT (VERTICAL)

Specification : A02B–0222–C072#

An appropriate support for the


CRT/unit should be provided.
Ventilation opening
Unit support
(for reference)

230
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 11–2 14″ CRT/MDI UNIT (VERTICAL)

Specification : A02B–0200–C072#

8–φ4.8

Panel cut drawing

Ventilation opening An appropriate support for the


CRT/unit should be provided.
Unit support Weight : 21kg
(for reference)

231
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 12 SEPARATE TYPE 9″ CRT UNIT (MONOCHROME)

Specification : A02B–0120–C111

184
190
244
250
4–M3
Panel cut drawing
260 2
4–ø4 5 5
250 22 220
5
190
200
5

Weight : 3.5kg

232
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 13 SEPARATE TYPE 9″ CRT UNIT (COLOR)

Specification : A02B–0120–C112

Panel cut drawing

Weight : 8kg

233
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 14 SEPARATE TYPE MDI UNIT (SMALL TYPE)

Specification : A02B–0120–C121

65

4–ø4 2
175
5 165 5 22 21
80MAX
5

118
200
190

40
5

190
184

159
165 4–M3

Panel cut drawing


Weight : 1 kg

234
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 15 SEPARATE TYPE MDI UNIT (STANDARD)

Specification : A02B–0120–C122

Weight : 1.5kg

235
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig.16.1 SEPARATE TYPE 9″ PDP UNIT

Specification : A02B–0120–C113

2
22 85MAX

5
200

5 250 5190
260 5

58 114 88

CN2 CN1

Screw (M4) for grounding Connector for CRT video signal


Connector for power supply

Weight : 2.1kg

236
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig.16.2 SEPARATE TYPE 9″ PDP UNIT (for CE Marking)

Specification : A02B–0200–C100

2
22 95MAX

5
200

5 250 190
5
260 5

58 130 88

Power supply connector


CN2 (B2P–VH, Manufactured by J.S.T.
corporation)
CN2 CN1
2
1 Vin+ (+24V)
2 Vin–( 0V)
1
Cable housing : VHR–2N
(Manufactured by
J.S.T. corporation)
Cable contact : SVH–21T–1.1
(Manufactured by
J.S.T. corporation)

Grounding xcrew (M4) CRT video signal connection


Power connection
CN1 (HONDA : MR–20RM)
Cable case (HONDA : MR–20LFH)
Weight : 2.1kg
Female connector (HONDA : MR–20FH)

237
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig.16.3 9″ PDP/MDI UNIT

Specification : A02B–0200–C101

238
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 17 PDP/MDI UNIT

5 5
170 170 170 8–φ4

5
200

190
85 max

5
520
22 2
Back plane

CN2 CN1

ON button
CK1
OFF button

Keyboard signal 200V power Video signal


Panel cut
170 170 170
8–M3
190

184

504

239
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 18 SEPARATE TYPE 7.2″ LCD UNIT

Specification : A02B–0222–C081

: Provide a space more than 20mm below the unit for cable forming.

240
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 19 SEPARATE TYPE 8.4″ LCD UNIT

Specification : A02B–0222–C053

: Provide a space more than 20mm below the unit for cable forming.

241
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 20 8.4″ LCD/MDI UNIT (SMALL TYPE)

Specification : A02B–0222–C131

Panel cut drawing

242
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 21 8.4″ LCD/MDI UNIT (STANDARD)

Specification : A02B–0222–C135

Panel cut drawing

243
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 22 9.5″ LCD/MDI UNIT (HORIZONTAL)

Specification : A02B–0222–C061
A02B–0200–C065

Panel cut drawing

244
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 23 9.5″ LCD/MDI UNIT (VERTICAL)

Specification : A02B–0222–C062
A02B–0200–C066

Panel cut drawing

245
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 24 SEPARATE TYPE 9.5″ LCD UNIT (MONOCHROME)

Specification : A02B–0222–C110

Panel cut drawing

246
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 25 SEPARATE TYPE MDI UNIT (for 9.5″ LCD, HORIZONTAL)

Specification : A02B–0200–C125

Panel cut drawing

247
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 26 SEPARATE TYPE MDI UNIT (for 9.5″ LCD, VERTICAL)

Specification : A02B–0200–C126

280
190

184

Panel cut drawing

274

248
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 27 POSITION CODER

Specification : A86L–0026–0001#102 (Max. 4000rpm)


A86L–0026–0001#002 (Max. 6000rpm)

–0.11
14.3 +0

 

–0.006
 15 –0.017
–0.009
 50 –0.025
 
1.15 +0.14
–0

20

Connector 30
3

 

Note : Mechanical specifications of the position coder


are as follows :
(1) Input axis inertia
1.0×10–3kg⋅cm⋅sec2 or less
+0.012 (2) Input axis starting torque
 –0 1000g⋅cm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads

Radial Thrust
 +0.05 Operation 1kg or less 1kg or less
–0
Idle 20kg or less 10kg or less

Attach a pulley directly to the position coder


shaft and drive the timing belt. Confirm that the
loads conform with the above allowable value.

(4) Weight : 1kg or less





249
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 28 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

Specification : A860–0202–T001

83.5
80.0
55.0
50.0
30.0

M4X8.0

60.0

3 holes equally spaced


on a 72 dia
11.0

PULSE GENERATOR
FANUC LTD
0V A 5VB

M3 screw terminal
120.0°

250
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 29 PENDANT TYPE MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

Specification : A860–0202–T004 to T015

A860–0202–T004 to T009

90 38.0 M3 screw
terminal
25
140

100.0
39.0
M3 screw
terminal

A860–0202–T010 to T015

90 38.0 M3 screw
terminal
25
140

100.0
39.0

M3 screw
terminal

251
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 30 BATTERY CASE FOR SEPARATE TYPE ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER

103 Minus polarity indication


4–M4 counter sinking Plus polarity indication

Plus terminal with


3–M3 screw holes

103 Minus terminal with



3–M3 screw holes




4–ø4.3 Mounting holes
Arrow view A







 

252
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 31 PUNCH PANEL (WIDE WIDTH TYPE)

Specification : A02B–0120–C181 (Cable length : 1m)


A02B–0120–C182 (Cable length : 2m)
A02B–0120–C183 (Cable length : 5m)

80
5
13

5
125

Panel cut drawing of this punch panel is shown in the following:







 

253
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 32 PUNCH PANEL (NARROW WIDTH TYPE)

Specification : A02B–0120–C191 (Cable length : 1m)


A02B–0120–C192 (Cable length : 2m)
A02B–0120–C193 (Cable length : 5m)

40
20 13

5
125
5

Panel cut drawing of this punch panel is shown in the following:








2–M3

254
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 33 PORTABLE TAPE READER WITHOUT REELS

205
300

380 240

Paint :Munsell No. 5GY3.5/0.5 leather tone finish


Weight : Applox. 15kg

255
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 34 PORTABLE TAPE READER WITH REELS

530

210
320

256
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 35 TAPE READER WITHOUT REELS (SERIAL INTERFACE)

Wiring screw M36

Power terminal strip

Signal cable Cable holder


View from allow A

Signal cable connector

Coating color : Metallic silver


Weight : 6kg (Panel cut diagram)
Unit : mm

Note )
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes
and secure with screws and nuts. If this is not convenient,
attach a M5 stud in φ5.3 hole and secure with a nut.

257
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 36 TAPE READER WITH REELS

View from arrow A

M510
stud

4–φ5.3

RS–232–C
Interface connector
Power connector

A
(Panel cut diagram)

Parallel interface Coating color : Metallic silver


connector Weight : 9kg
Unit : mm

Note )
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes
and secure with screws and nuts. If this is not convenient,
attach a M5 stud in φ5.3 hole and secure with a nut.

258
B–62753EN/01 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 37 CONTROL TRANSFORMER

Specification : A80L–0001–0176

CAUTION
TURN MAIN LINE SWITCH OFF BEFORE HANDLING TB1 OR TB2

Max. 155

167 110
Max. 175

7 125
110

Weight : 14kg
Unit : mm

259
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–62753EN/01

Fig. 38 CONTROL TRANSFORMER

Specification of control transformer

D Primary side rated voltage


200V/220V/230V/380V/415V/440V/460V/480V/550VDC
D Voltage fluctuation
Primary side rated voltage +10%, –15%
D Frequency and variation
50Hz/60Hz"3Hz
D Secondary side line voltage
See the figure below.
D Secondary side voltage deviation
Less than "3%
D Secondary side voltage regulation
Less than 7%
D Transformer ambient temperature and humidity
–5°C+60°C 10 – 95% (Relative humidity)

TB1

550
480
460
440
415
380 TB2
240
230
200A
220
200
200
to
550V
200V 5A

100V 100A
1A
COM 200B
100B

260
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

B   
      

Number
Name of
Figure
PCR CONNECTOR (SOLDERING TYPE) Fig. 1
FI40 CONNECTOR Fig. 2
CONNECTOR CASE (HONDA PCR TYPE) Fig. 3
CONNECTOR CASE (HIROSE FI TYPE) Fig. 4
CONNECTOR CASE (FUJITSU FCN TYPE) Fig. 5
AMP CONNECTOR (1) Fig. 6
AMP CONNECTOR (2) Fig. 7
AMP CONNECTOR (3) Fig. 8
AMP CONNECTOR (4) Fig. 9
CONTACT FOR AMP CONNECTOR Fig. 10
HONDA CONNECTOR (CASE) Fig. 11
HONDA CONNECTOR (FEMALE) Fig. 12
HONDA CONNECTOR (MALE) Fig. 13
HONDA CONNECTOR (TERMINAL LAYOUT) Fig. 14
CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (3 PINS, BLACK) Fig. 15
CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (3 PINS, BROWN) Fig. 16
CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (3 PINS, WHITE) Fig. 17
CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (6 PINS, BROWN) Fig. 18
CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (6 PINS, WHITE) Fig. 19
READER PUNCHER PANEL CONNECTOR Fig. 20
READER PUNCHER CONNECTOR METAL FITTING FOR LOCK Fig. 21
POWER RECEPTACLE FOR PORTABLE TAPE READER Fig. 22
CONNECTOR FOR HIROSE FLAT CABLE Fig. 23

261
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 1 PCR CONNECTOR (SOLDERING TYPE)

TYPE : HONDA PCR–E20FS(SOLDERING TYPE)


USAGE : GENERAL
MATING : HONDA PCS–E20LA(METAL)
HOUSING : HONDA PCR–V20L(PLASTIC)

DIMENSION

A
n
2 1.27 1
7.3

n n)1
2

Display
HONDA
7
15.1

1.27
B

A B
PCR-E20FS 21.65 11.43

262
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 2 FI40 CONNECTOR

TYPE : HIROSE FI40–2015S


USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING : HIROSE FI–20–CV

DIMENSION

16.25 15°
11.43
1.27
Note
This connector does not
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
have contacts for positions
5.5
2.2

1.7
9.2 11,13,15,17, and 19.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

13.35
19.2

Tab for
shield
connection
7


4.3
3


5
8.5

(1)
1.8


A A
2.4 2.4
Section AA S 20 18 16 14 12
(Standard 1/10)
View from the back (soldering side)
10 8 6 4 2

9 7 5 3 1

263
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 3 CONNECTOR CASE (HONDA PCR TYPE)

TYPE : HONDA PCR–V20LA(for 6 dia. cable)


USAGE : GENERAL

DIMENSION
9.5

21 11.4

(1)


HONDA
37

30

 





(1) (2) Case


(3) Cable clamp
(4) Lock bracket
(5) Lock lever
(6) Set screw for cable clamp

264
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 4 CONNECTOR CASE (HIROSE FI TYPE)

TYPE : HIROSE FI–20–CV


USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
DIMENSION

(1) (2) Case


(3) Cable clamp
(4) Lock bracket
(5) Lock lever
(6) Set screw for cable clamp

21±0.3
11.5±0.3
9.5±0.2





37"0.5
17.5"0.3



30±0.3
 (1)

265
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 5 CONNECTOR CASE (FUJITSU FCN TYPE)

TYPE : FUJITSU FCN–240C20–Y/S(for 5.8 dia. cable)


USAGE : GENERAL

9.5

21 11.4
(2)

F
C020–02
37

30

Cable clamp
Screw

Lock lever

266
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 6 AMP CONNECTOR (1)

TYPE : AMP1–178128–3

USAGE : POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP1  G


200VAC INPUT  S
Key location
 R

POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP2  G


CP3
 200B
 200A

10″LCD/MDI UNIT CP11  G


 200B
 200A
DIMENSION

(25.5) Circuit No.

3 2 1
AMP D–3

X
22.8
16.3

19.24
0.6

10.16
5.08
7.15
4.05

6.55
3.1

3 2 1

Circuit No.

267
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 7 AMP CONNECTOR (2)

TYPE : AMP2–178129–6

USAGE : POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP4  FB  COM


ON/OFF CONTROL  FA  OFF
 AL  ON
DIMENSION

Circuit No.

Circuit No.

268
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 8 AMP CONNECTOR (3)

TYPE : AMP2–178288–3

USAGE : POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP5



+24V OUTPUT
 0V

DIMENSION  +24V

(22.96) Circuit No.

3 2 1
AMP D–3

Y
22.8
16.3

16.7
0.6

7.62
3.81

7.15
4.05

6.55
3.1

3 2 1

Circuit No.

269
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 9 AMP CONNECTOR (4)

TYPE : AMP1–178288–3

USAGE : POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP6


+24E OUTPUT 
 0V
DIMENSION  +24E

(22.96) Circuit No.

3 2 1
AMP D–3

X
22.8
16.3

16.7
0.6

7.62
3.81

7.15
4.05

6.55
3.1

3 2 1

Circuit No.

270
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 10 CONTACT FOR AMP CONNECTOR

SEPARATE : AMP1–175218–2(Gold coated)


AMP1–175218–5(Tin coated)
REEL : AMP1–175196–2(Gold coated)
AMP1–175196–5(Tin coated)
WIRE : AWG 16, 18, 20
In case of reel
(21.8)
A–A
2.9 "0.4

2.9 "0.5

3
"0.5 B–B
17.8
"0.4
(9.3) (2.5) 
B
2.9 "0.2 A
"0.2

"0.5

3.4

–AMP
"0.2
2.5

PLATING 1D–MARK (2.6)


((1.7))
A B
PRESSER 1D–MARK

271
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 11 HONDA CONNECTOR (CASE)








C


A (D)
(B)

Symbol Number of
Specification A (B) C (D) terminals
MR–20LMH (Plug)
39.3 44.9 39.8 17 20
MR–20LFH (Jack)
MR–50LMH (Plug)
67.9 73.5 44.8 18 50
MR–50LFH (Jack)

Symbol Name
Outer diameter of the cable
1 Connector cover MR–20L dia.10mm max
2 Cable clamp MR–50L dia.16mm max
3 Stopper
4 Screw for cable clamp
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
5
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)

272
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 12 HONDA CONNECTOR (FEMALE)

2–M2
13

A
B



2.4
18.1


6
8.5



14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA

8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Number of
A B terminals
MR–20RMH 32.8 27.8 20
MR–50RHF 61.4 56.4 50

Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
3 Connector (MR–20,–50FH)

273
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 13 HONDA CONNECTOR (MALE)

2–M2
13

B
A



2.4
19.9

8.4


10.9



1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA

8 9 10 11 12 13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Number of
A B terminals
MR–20RMH 32.8 27.8 20
MR–50RMH 61.4 56.4 50

Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
3 Connector (MR–20,–50FH)

274
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 14 HONDA CONNECTOR (TERMINAL LAYOUT)

D MR–50MH (50–core, plug)

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

D MR–50MH(50–core, jack)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

D MR–20MH(20–core, plug)

14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

D MR–20MH(20–core, jack)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

275
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 15 CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (3 PINS, BLACK)

19.06"0.2
3

32 max.
5.08
2
1

6 "0.2
7.7

30

Manufacturer : BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.


Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)

Connector housing for cable SMS3PK–5 Black


For details on tools
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3
required for crimp
Contact terminals,contact the
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 manufacturer.

Cables : Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)


Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm

276
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 16 CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (3 PINS, BROWN)

19.06 "0.2
5.08
1

32 max.
2
3

6 "0.2
7.7

30

Manufacturer : BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.


Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)

Connector housing for cable SMS3PNS–5 Brown


For details on tools
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3
required for crimp
Contact terminals,contact the
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 manufacturer.

Cables : Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)


Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm

277
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 17 CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (3 PINS, WHITE)

19.06 "0.2
5.08
1

32 max.
2
3

6 "0.2
7.7

30

Manufacturer : BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.


Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)

Connector housing for cable SMS3PW–5 White


For details on tools
required for crimp
Contact (Crimp type) RC16M–23D28
terminals,contact the
manufacturer.

Cables : Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)


Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm

278
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 18 CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (6 PINS, BROWN)

5.08
5

38 max.

48 max.
4
3

1
2
1

7 max.

24.9

Manufacturer : BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.


Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)

Connector housing for cable SMS6PN–5 Brown


For details on tools
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3
required for crimp
Contact terminals,contact the
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 manufacturer.

Cables : Cross sectional area : 1.27mm2(50/0.18)


Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm

279
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 19 CONNECTOR MADE BY BURNDY (6 PINS, WHITE)

5.08
5

38 max.

48 max.
4
3

1
2
1

7 max.

24.9

Manufacturer : BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.


Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)

Connector housing for cable SMS6PW–5 White


For details on tools
required for crimp
Contact (Crimp type) RC16M–23T28 terminals,contact the
manufacturer.

Cables : Cross sectional area : 1.27mm2(50/0.18)


Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm

280
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 20 READER PUNCHER PANEL CONNECTOR

H
J
A 53.0 D 7.8 G 10.7
B 38.3 E 12.6 H 1.2
C 47.0 F 41.3 J 0.8
A
C
B A–A F
A cross section 10

E G
D
6.1 10
A
2–3.05 10.8
10

Fig. 21 READER PUNCHER CONNECTOR METAL FITTING FOR LOCK

Small round
M2.6×P0.45 screw Interlock screw head screw
1.2 groove

6.1

12.7
1.2
6.2 Spring washer

281
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR B–62753EN/01

Fig. 22 POWER RECEPTACLE FOR PORTABLE TAPE READER

MAX27
5 20

MAX43.5
40.5
60.5
83.5
34.5φ

104
4.8

1.2
14
25

Color : Cream

Note) When connecting with crimp terminal, use M4 terminal (all 3 poles)

282
B–62753EN/01 B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR

Fig. 23 CONNECTOR FOR HIROSE FLAT CABLE

Specification HIROSE ELEC. CO.


HIF3BA–20D–2. 54R (20contacts)
HIF3BB–50D–2. 54R (50contacts)
HIF3BA
HIF3BB

15.6

14.4
1.27 1.27 1.09

1.27

Section A–A’ Section B–B’ ASS’Y DIAGRAM

MAIN BODY PROTECTOR CRAMP

A A A
2.54

D
6.0

A A’ B

3.6
6.0

6.0
1.27 2.54
B’ 3.81
B
D
3.5
3.8 *1
*2

*3
7.0 3.5
7.0

10.5

5.1
0.95
0.3

8.5
1.05
2.3 2.3
2.7

C 3.5
4.5

Dimensions No.of
Description A B C D
contact
HIF3BA–20D–2.54R 20 29.97 22.86 24.13 25.5
HIF3BB–50D–2.54R 50 68.07 60.96 62.23 63.6
FLAT CABLE CONNECTOR CONTACT NUMBER (HIROSE)

OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE. AOI MARK


20PINS (SIDE) POLARITY GUIDANCE
ROW B
ROW A
ROW A
ROW B
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE. 01 03 05 07 09
50PINS 02 04 06 08 10

01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

283
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–62753EN/01

C 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

Connector for the PC Model: PCR–EV20MDT manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN.


board The connector for the PC board has been specially developed to support
FANUC’s high–mounting density. PCR connectors made by HONDA
TSUSHIN are compatible with the mating part of the connector and can
be selected for the cable connection.

Cable connector The cable connector is separated into a body and a housing. The
connectors available are shown below. Models marked with (*) have
been customized for FANUC; those not so marked are mass produced as
standard products.

Cable General Connector HONDA PCR–E20FA


connector purpose body TSUSHIN (Separate–wire
press–mount type)
HONDA PCR–E20FS
TSUSHIN (Solder type)

Housing HONDA PCS–E20LA


TSUSHIN (Metal)

HONDA PCR–V20LA*
TSUSHIN (Plastic)

Pulse Connector HIROSE FI40–2015S*


coder and body ELECTRIC (Solder type with
coaxial 15 pins)
cable Housing HIROSE FI–20–CV*
ELECTRIC (Plastic)

Required tools for Separate–wire press–mount type


Connection of cable Connector : PCR–E20FA (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
connector 28–AWG wires are assembled at a time. Generally, it is much more cost
effective to assemble a cable this way than by using solder or press–mount
type connectors. The tools required are :
– Cassette for wire arrangement :
JGPS–015–1/1–20 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
– Base for cassette :
JGPS–014 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
– Press–mount locator :
PCS–K1 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
– Hand press : MFC–K1 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)

284
B–62753EN/01 C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

Solder type
Connector : PCR–E20FS (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
Wires of 20 AWG or smaller can be soldered to the connector. However,
soldering many of these wires together lowers work efficiency because
the pitch of the soldering portion of the connector is too small to support
it.

To increase work efficiency HIROSE ELECTRIC has developed a new


connector. By thinning out the number of pins, its soldering portion has
a pitch equal to that of the conventional HONDA TSUSHIN MF
connectors. The FI40–2015S can be used for interfacing pulse coders and
manual pulse generators which require wires up to as 20 AWG thick for
connection with a +5V power source.

Cable wires Cable wires generally need to be developed or ordered by the machine tool
builder for the Series 16/18.
FANUC has developed wires that specifically suit the interface connector
of the Series 16/18. They are listed in the table below, for your
convenience when ordering from the manufacturer.

Cable Use Structure FANUC specification No. Manufacturer Remarks


type

10–pair General purpose Ten 0.08mm2 A66L–0001–0284#10P HITACHI CABLE, LTD.


cable pairs OKI ELECTRIC CABLE.,
LTD.

5–core CRT interface Coaxial five A66L–0001–0371 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 50m
coaxial (for long distances) cores maximum
cable

Composite Pulse coders,linear Six 0.05mm2 A66L–0001–0286 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 20m
12–core scales,and manual pulse wires and three OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., maximum
cable generators 0.18mm2 pairs LTD. (Note 2)
(Note 2)

Note
For the pulse coder, scale, and manual pulse generator, each of which has a +5–V power
supply, wires need to be selected taking into consideration the supply voltage drop caused by
the resistance of the cable.
A66L–0001–0371 is larger in diameter than conventional cable, therefore, use it with the
following connector as a pair:
FI40A–20S (connector) : Hirose
FI–20–CV5 (case) : Hirose
A66L–0001–0286 has been designed for use with a cable length of 20 mm or less. If the cable
length exceeds 20 m, use a cable with a lower resistance, such as A66L–0001–0157.
The number of manual pulse generators to be connected is assumed to be three. If only one
generator is connected, the cable can be extended to a maximum of 50 m by connecting wires
in parallel a cross–sectional area of 0.5 mm2 for the power supply.

285
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–62753EN/01

10–pair cable

D   
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. – A66L–0001–0284#10P
Manufacturer HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., LTD.
Rating – 60°C 30V:UL2789
80°C 30V:UL80276
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper
(ASTM B–286)
Insulator – Cross–linked vinyl
Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath – Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl
Number of pairs Pairs 10
Conductor Size AWG 28
Structure Conduc- 7/0.127
tors
/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.38
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1
Thinnest portion : 0.08 (3.1mm)
Outside diameter mm 0.58
(approx.)
Core style (rating) mm UL15157(80°C, 30V)
Twisted Outside diameter mm 1.16
pair (approx.)
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Collect the required number of twisted
pairs into a cable, then wrap binding tape
around the cable. To make the cable
round, apply a cable separator as
required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
Drain wire Conduc- Hitachi Cable : Not available
tors Oki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12
/mm
Shield Element wire mm 0.12
braid diameter
Braid density % 85 or more
Sheath Color – Black
Thickness mm 1.0
Outside diameter mm 6.2
(approx.)
Standard length m 200
Packing method – Bundle
Electrical Electric resis- /km 233 or less
perfor- tance(at 20°C)
mance
Insulation resis- M–km 10 or more
tance (at 20°C)
Dielectric V/min. 300
strength (AC)
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC
of UL standards.

286
B–62753EN/01 C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

D Cable structure The cable structure is shown below.

Wire identification table (HITACHI)


Insulator color
Wire No. First Second
wire wire
1
Twisted 1 Blue White
10 2 pair wire
2 Yellow White
5
Binding 3 Green White
9 3 tape
4 Red White
6 Shield
braid 5 Purple White
8 4
Sheath 6 Blue Brown
7
7 Yellow Brown
8 Green Brown
9 Red Brown
10 Purple Brown

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.

Fig. 1 Cable made by Hitachi Cable

Wire identification table (OKI)

Dot mark (1 pitch)


Dot mark

Insulator color
color

Pair No.
Drain First Second
wire wire wire

1 1 Orange – Red Black


Twisted
10 2 –pair 2 Gray – Red Black
wire
6 3 white – Red Black
Binding
9 3 tape Red Black
4 Yellow –
7 Shield Red Black
braid
5 Pink –
8 4
Sheath
6 Orange –– Red Black
5
7 Gray –– Red Black
8 White –– Red Black

9 Yellow –– Red Black


10 Pink –– Red Black

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.

Fig. 2 Cable made by Oki Electric Cable

287
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–62753EN/01

12–core cable
D   
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. – A66L–0001–0286
Manufacturer – HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., LTD.
Rating – 80_C, 30V
Material Conductor,braid–shielded – Strand wire of tinned annealed
wire,drain wire copper (JIS C3152)
Insulator – Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl
Sheath – Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–re-
tardant vinyl
Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs)
(7 to 9)
Con- Size mm2 0.5 0.18
d t
ductor Structure Conduc- 20/0.18 7/0.18
tors
/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54
Insula- Standard thickness mm 0.25 0.2
tor (The minimum thickness is
at least 80% of the stan-
dard thickness.)
Outside diameter mm 1.50 0.94
Twisted Outside diameter mm 1.88
pair
i Direction of lay – Left
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Twist the wires at an appropriate
pitch so the outermost layer is right–
twisted, and wrap tape around the
outermost layer.
Apply a cable separator as required.
Lay diameter mm 5.7
Drain Size mm2 0.3
i
wire Structure Wires/ 12/0.18
mm
Outside diameter mm 0.72
Shield Element wire diameter mm 0.12
b id
braid Thickness mm 0.3
Braid density % 70
Outside diameter mm 6.3
Sheath Color – Black
Standard thickness mm 1.1
(The minimum thickness is
at least 85% of the stan-
dard thickness.)
Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0(1)
Standard length m 100
Packing method – Bundle
Electri- Electric resistance /km 39.4(1 to 6) 113(7 to 9)
cal per- (at 20_C) (wire nos.)
f
for- Insulation resistance M–km 15
mance (at 20_C)
Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 500
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test
VW–1SC of UL standards,

(Note 1) The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other than


the drain wire.

288
B–62753EN/01 C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

D Markings on cable D Name or symbol of the manufacturer


D Manufacturing year

D 
 
 The cable structure is shown below.

Drain wire

Red
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
7
6 White 1
Red Black 0.5–mm2 insulated wire

Red Binding tape


5 2
Red
8 black
Black Shield braid
4 3
Red Black black Sheath
9
White

The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.

289
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–62753EN/01

5–core coaxial cable


D   
Item Unit Description

Specification – A66L–0001–0371
Manufacture – HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD.
Manufacture’s specification – CO–IREFV(0)–CX–75–SB 5X0.14SQ
Number of Conductors Core 5
Inside Con- Size mm2 0.14
ductor
Components Conduc- 7/0.16
tors
(PCS)/m
m
Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire
Diameter mm 0.48
Insulator Material (Color) – Polyethylene (White)
Thickness mm 0.71
Diameter mm 1.90
Outside Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled)
Conductor
Diameter of Com- mm 0.08
ponent–Wire
Density % 95 or more
Diameter mm 0.2
Jacket Material – Vinyl
Color – Black. White. Red. Green. Blue
Thickness mm 0.15
Diameter mm 2.6
Twisted Assembly Diameter mm 7.1
Thickness of Paper Tape mm 0.05
Shield Wire dia. Material mm 0.12
braid Tin–coaded soft copper wire
Density % 80 or more
Thickness mm 0.3
Diameter mm 7.8
Sheath Material, Color – Oil Tight Vinyl Black
Thickness mm 0.7 (Min. thickness: 0.56)
Finish Diameter mm 9.2 "0.3
Conductor Resistance (20°C) /km 143
Withstand Voltage (A.C.) V/min. 1000
Insulation Resistance (20°C) M–km 1000
Impedance (10MHz)  75±5
Standard Capacitance (1MHz) nF/km 56
Standard Attention (10MHz) dB/km 53
Weight kg/km 105
Standard Length m 200
Package form – Bundle

290
B–62753EN/01 C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

D 
 
 The cable structure is shown below.

Coaxial core

ÊÊ
red
Thread

ÊÊ
green
black

White ÊÊ blue Tape


Shield braid
Sheath

ÊÊÊ
Inside conductor

ÊÊÊ Insulator
Outside conductor (braid)

Jacket

291
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–62753EN/01

Cable for DI/DO


Conductor Electric
Total characteristic Designa-
Sheath
Name o ter
outer tion
Outer dia. Composition thickness Conductor Allowable
dia. (Note)
resistance current
A66L
Cable A
ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.5mm ø10.0mm 11/km 1.6A –0001
(10–pair)
–0041

A66L
Cable B
ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.7mm ø12.5mm 106/km 1.6A –0001
(50 core)
–0042

Cable C ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.6A A66L


(5– air,
(5–pair 116/km
1.0mm
1 0mm ø11.0mm
ø11 0mm –0001
6 core) 16/km
ø1.5mm 50/0.18 10A –0157

Total shield
Individual shield
(for tachogenerator
signal)

For power (50/0.18)


(+5V×3.0V×3)

Pair cable (7/0.18)

292
B–62753EN/01 D. LIST OF UNIT FOR CE MARKING

D LIST OF UNIT FOR CE MARKING

293
D. LIST OF UNIT FOR CE MARKING B–62753EN/01

LIST OF UNITS FOR CE


MARKING
CNC Unit Specification Remarks

Series AI Power unit A02B–0200–H106


16–C BI Power unit A02B–0200–H107
Series I/O card A02B–0200–H084 40/40 With high–speed skip
18–C (source output) A02B–0200–H085 80/56 With high–speed skip
A02B–0200–H086 104/72 With high–speed skip
A02B–0200–J180 40/40 W/O high–speed skip
A02B–0200–J181 80/56 W/O high–speed skip
A02B–0200–J182 104/72 W/O high–speed skip
A02B–0200–J183 156/120 W/O high–speed skip
A02B–0200–J184 40/40 With high–speed skip
A02B–0200–J185 80/56 With high–speed skip
A02B–0200–J186 104/72 With high–speed skip
A02B–0200–J187 156/120 With high–speed skip

Extended I/O A20B–2001–0880


F3, F4 A20B–2001–0881

Operator’s A20B–2202–0730
panel A20B–2202–0731
connection
(source)

Separate A02B–0120–C111 Monochrome (Note 1)


9″ CRT

Saparate A02B–0200–C100 Monochrome


9″ PDP

Separate A02B–0222–C053 Color


8.4″ LCD

Separate A02B–0222–C081 Monochrome


7.2″ LCD

Note
In a separate type 9″ monochrome CRT, a cover
(A02B–0200–K820) must be ordered and mounted by
MTB.

294
B–62753EN/01 D. LIST OF UNIT FOR CE MARKING

LIST OF UNITS FOR CE


MARKING
CNC Unit Specification Remarks
(H) : Horizontal
(V) : Vertical 16/18– 9” CRT/MDI A02B–0120–C041#TAS Monochrome small type (H)
TC A02B–0120–C051#TAS Monochrome standard type (H)

9” PDP/MDI A02B–0120–C101#TBS Monochrome standard type (H)

9.5” LCD/MDI A02B–0222–C061#TBS Standard type, Horizontal


A02B–0222–C061#TFBS Standard type, Horizontal
CAP–II
A02B–0222–C062#TBS Standard type, Vertical
A02B–0222–C062#TFBS Standard type, Vertical CAP–II
A02B–0200–C065#TBS MMC–IV analog standard type,
Horizontal
A02B–0200–C065#TFBS MMC–IV analog standard type,
Horizontal, CAP–II
A02B–0200–C066#TBS MMC–IV analog standard type,
Vertical
A02B–0200–C066#TFBR MMC–IV analog standard type,
Vertical, CAP–II

14” CRT/MDI A02B–0222–C071#TBS Standard type, Horizontal


A02B–0222–C071#TFBR Standard type, Horizontal
A02B–0222–C072#TBS Standard type, Vertical
A02B–0222–C072#TFBR Standard type, Vertical
A02B–0200–C071#TBS MMC–IV analog standard type,
Horizontal
A02B–0200–C071#TFBR MMC–IV analog standard type,
Horizontal, CAP–II
A02B–0200–C072#TBS MMC–IV analog standard type,
Vertical
A02B–0200–C072#TFBR MMC–IV analog standard type,
Vertical, CAP–II

Separate type A02B–0120–C121#TAS Small type


MDI A02B–0120–C122#TAS Standard type
A02B–0200–C125#TAS Standard type, Horizontal,
9.5″ LCD
A02B–0200–C126#TAS Standard type, Vertical ,
9.5″ LCD

16/18– 9” CRT/MDI A02B–0120–C041 #MAS Monochrome small type (H)


MC A02B–0120–C051 #MAS Monochrome standard type (H)

9” PDP/MDI A02B–0120–C101 #MBS Monochrome standard type (H)

9.5” LCD/MDI A02B–0222–C061#MBS Standard type, Horizontal


A02B–0222–C062#MBS Standard type, Vertical
A02B–0200–C065#MBS MMC–IV analog, standard
type, Horizontal
A02B–0200–C066#MBS MMC–IV analog, standard
type, Vertical

14” CRT/MDI A02B–0222–C071#MBS Analog CRT, Horizontal


A02B–0222–C072#MBS Analog CRT, Vertical
A02B–0200–C071#MBS MMC–IV analog, standard
type, Horizontal
A02B–0200–C072#MBS MMC–IV analog, standard
type, Vertical

Separate type A02B–0120–C121#MAS Small type


MDI A02B–0120–C122#MAS Standard type
A02B–0200–C125#MAS Standard type, Horizontal,
9.5″ LCD
A02B–0200–C126#MAS Standard type, Vertical ,
9.5″ LCD

295
D. LIST OF UNIT FOR CE MARKING B–62753EN/01

Notes
1 When the separate type 9″ monochrome CRT is used ,
prepare the cover (A02B–0200–K820) separately.
2 For 14″ CRT/MDI, CRT display circuit shall be
A02B–0200–H045.
3 For 14″ CRT/MDI with CAP II, the CRT display circuit of the
CNC (on option / board) shall be A02B–0200–J043.

296
B–62753EN/01 Index
Numbers C
1 to 1 connection, 190 Cable clamp and shield processing, 27
10–pair cable, 286 Cable for DI/DO, 292
12–core cable, 288 Cable for power supply to control unit, 66
14″ CRT/MDI unit (horizontal), 228, 229 Cable K1X, 77
14″ CRT/MDI unit (vertical), 230, 231 Cable K2X, 79
2–slot control unit, 219 Cable lead–in diagram, 36
20–pin interface connectors and cables, 284 Cautionary points when wiring terminal block type, 82
24V input power source, 63 Change in temperature, 5
3–slot control unit, 220 Control unit, 30
4–slot control unit, 221 Configuration, 3

6–core coaxial cable, 290 Configuration and installation of the control unit, 30

6–slot control unit, 222 Connecting input power source, 76

8.4″ LCD/MDI unit (small type), 242 Connecting signal cables, 77

8.4″ LCD/MDI unit (standard), 243 Connecting the signal ground (SG) of the control unit, 25

8–slot control unit, 223 Connecting with I/O modules, 81

9.5″ LCD/MDI unit (horizontal), 244, 245 Connection diagram, 75

9.5″ LCD/MDI unit (monochrome), 246 Connection of connector CA40, 98


Connection of connector CNB1, 98
9″ CRT/MDI unit (small type, color), 225
Connection of FANUC I/O link by electric cable, 70
9″ CRT/MDI unit (small type, monochrome), 224
Connection of FANUC I/O link optical fiber cable, 71
9″ CRT/MDI unit (standard, color), 227
Connection of FS0 operator’s panel, 124
9″ CRT/MDI unit (Standard, monochrome), 226
Connection of I/O units to machine interface, 67
9″ PDP/MDI unit, 238
Connection of machine operator’s panel interface unit, 86
Connection of operator’s panel connection unit, 108


Connection of source output type connection unit, 114
Connection of tape reader with reels, 181
 series spindle amplifier interface, 197
Connection of tape reader without reels, 180
Connection of the FANUC I/O link, 69
Connection of the FANUC I/O unit–MODEL A, 73
A Connection to CNC peripherals, 161
Abbreviations, 1 Connector (on the cable side) specifications, 102
Action against noise, 22 Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type), 266
Address map, 153 Connector case (HIROSE FI type), 265
Address mapping of I/O card (Sink type), 140 Connector case (HONDA PCR type), 264
Adjusting the flat display, 173 Connector for HIROSE flat cable, 283
AMP connector (1), 267 Connector for the PC board, 284
AMP connector (2), 268 Connector layout for operator’s panel connection unit, 111
AMP connector (3), 269 Connector layout for sink output type I/O card, 135
AMP connector (4), 270 Connector layout for source output type I/O card, 147
Analog signal inputs, 87, 99 Connector layout of I/O card, 43
Analog signal interface, 212 Connector layout of loader control board (Series 16/160 Series
18/180), 44
Analog spindle interface, 196
Connector layout of main CPU board, 39, 45
APC battery interface, 211
Connector layout of option 2 board (Series 16/160, Series
18/180), 41
Connector layout of option–1A board, 40
B Connector layout of option–3 board, 42

Battery case for separate type absolute pulse coder, 252 Connector layout of power supply unit, 37

Battery for memory backup, 34 Connector made by BURNDY (6 pins, white), 280
Connector made by BURNDY (3 pins, black), 276

i–1
INDEX B–92753EN/01

Connector made by BURNDY (3 pins, brown), 277 General–purpose DO, 91


Connector made by BURNDY (3 pins, white), 278
Connector made by BURNDY (6 pins, brown), 279
Connector pin signal assignment, 89 H
Connector pin layout for source output type connection unit, Heat exchanger for CRT/MDI unit, 10, 15
120
Heat loss of each unit, 9
Contact for AMP connector, 271
Heat pipe type heat exchanger, 10
Contrast adjustment for monochrome LCD, 174
High speed DI signal interface, 192
Control transformer, 259, 260
High–speed serial bus (HSSB) interface, 213
Cooling by heat exchanger, 8
HONDA connector (case), 272
Cooling fin A, 10
HONDA connector (female), 273
Cooling fin A/B/C, 10
HONDA connector (male), 274
Cooling fin B, 10
HONDA connector (Terminal layout), 275
Cooling fin C, 10
Correspondence between I/O signals and addresses in a mod-
ule, 84
CRT, PDP or LCD display interface, 167 I 
CRT/MDI unit interface, 162 I/O card connection, 130
I/O device interface, 176
Input signal MT→PMC, 141, 155

D Input signal connector pin layout for sink output type I/O card,
137
Design and installation conditions of the machine tool magnetic Input signal connector pin layout for source output type I/O
cabinet, 6 card, 149
Digital input/output module, 82 Input signal regulations for operator’s panel connection unit,
Dimensions of source output type connection unit, 122 109

Dismounting the terminal block, 81 Input signal specifications, 132, 145

DNC 1 interface, 189 Input signal specifications for source output type connection
unit, 115
DNC interface (RS–232–C), 191
Installation, 4
Installing the heat exchanger, 10
Interface for manual pulse generator, 98
E 
Environment, 5
Environmental requirements of outside the cabinet, 5 K
External dimension of optical link adapter, 71 Key switch addresses, 92
External dimensions of each connector, 261 Keyboard interface, 175
External dimensions of each unit, 217
External view of operator’s panel connection unit, 113

L 
LED addresses, 96
F  List of unit for CE marking, 293
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE connection, 179 List of units for CE marking, 294, 295
FI40 connector, 263
First manual pulse generator, 87
Fuse mounting position, 107 M 
Machine operator’s panel interface unit dimension diagram
(Including connector locations), 104

G Machine operator’s panel interface unit mounting dimension


diagram, 105
General–purpose DI, 91 Major connection precautions, 102
Ground, 24 Manual pulse generator, 250
Grounding, 76 Manual pulse generator interface, 182

i–2
B–62753EN/01 INDEX

Manuals related to the Series 16, 1 Punch panel (wide width type), 253
Matrix DI, 92
Matrix DO, 96
Mounting and dismounting modules, 74 R
Mounting the terminal block, 81 Reader puncher connector metal fitting for lock, 281
Multi–points connection, 189 Reader puncher panel connector, 281
Receiver input signal specifications for high–speed DI signals,
193

N Related manuals, 1


Relative humidity, 5
Noise suppressor, 26
Remote buffer interface (RS–232–C), 185
Notes on connecting the ground systems, 24
Remote buffer interface (RS–422), 187
Notes on selecting the spark killer, 26
Replacing the battery, 35
Number of DI/DO points, 86
Required tools for Connection of cable connector, 284
Number of points for I/O unit–MODEL A, 85
Room temperature, 5
RS–232–C serial port, 176

O
OT release, 100
S 
Output signal PMC→MT, 143, 157
Separate type 9″ PDP unit, 236
Output signal connector pin layout for sink output type I/O
card, 139 Separate type 7.2″ LCD unit, 240

Output signal connector pin layout for source output type I/O Separate type 8.4 LCD unit, 241
card, 151 Separate type 9.5″ MDI unit (for LCD, horizontal), 247
Output signal regulations for operator’s panel connection unit, Separate type 9.5″ MDI unit (for LCD, vertical), 248
110
Separate type 9″ CRT unit (color), 233
Output signal specifications, 145
Separate type 9″ CRT unit (monochrome), 232
Output signal specifications for source output type connection
unit, 116 Separate type 9″ PDP unit (for CE marking), 237
Separate type detector interface, 206
Separate type MDI unit (small type), 234
P  Separate type MDI unit (standard), 235

PCR connector (soldering type), 262 Separating signal Lines, 22

PDP/MDI unit, 239 Serial pulse coder interface, 202

Pendant type manual pulse generator, 251 Serial spindle interface, 195

PMC addresses, 101 Servo amplifier interface ( series servo amplifier), 201

Portable tape reader connection, 178 Servo interface, 200

Portable tape reader with reels, 256 Signal assignment, 89

Portable tape reader without reels, 255 Signal specifications for manual pulse generator, 184

Position coder, 249 Source output I/O card, 145

Position coder interface, 199 Specifications of the output signals of the I/O card (Sink type),
134
Power ON/OFF control signal, 100 Spindle interface, 194
Power receptacle for portable tape reader, 282 State of the LEDs on the machine operator’s panel interface
Power supply for the control unit, 63 unit, 102
Power supply unit connection, 56, 59 Structure of FANUC I/O unit–MODEL A, 73
Power supply unit panel layout, 57 System configuration, 88
PPR connection, 177
Procedure for replacing the battery, 35
Procedure for turning off the power, 65 T 
Procedure for turning on the power, 65 Tape reader with reels, 258
Product name, 1 Tape reader without reels (serial interface), 257
Punch panel (Narrow width type), 254 Temperature rise within the cabinet, 8

i–3
INDEX B–92753EN/01

Terminal for signal for warding, 87


V 
Terminator TX, 80 Vibration, 5
The heat pipe type heat exchanger, 18

Thermal design of the cabinet, 8

Total connection, 49
W
Weight of optical link adapter, 71

i–4
Revision Record

FANUC Series 16/18/160/180–MODEL C CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B–62753EN)

01 Nov., ’95

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents


· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

· All specifications and designs


are subject to change without
notice.

Potrebbero piacerti anche